FIRE ALARM

4100ESFire Alarm System

InstallationGuide

574-848Rev. BD

i

Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information

Copyright and Trademarks

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject to change without notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. VESDA is a trademark of Xtralis Pty Ltd. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

Cautions and

Warnings

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS - Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.

DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX® PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED- Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an authorized Simplex product supplier.

ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs should be performed by a representative or authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier.

STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows:• Ground yourself before opening or installing components.• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.

EYE SAFETY HAZARD - Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of this device may exceed eye safety limits. Do not use magnification (such as a microscope or other focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device.

SULFURIC ACID WARNING- Battery contains sulfuric acid, which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can destroy fabric. Replace any leaking or damaged battery while wearing appropriate protective gear. If you come in contact with sulfuric acid, immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.

FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS - PART 15 - This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

IMPORTANT: Verify FACP System Programmer, Executive, and Slave Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components. Refer to the Technical Support Information and Downloads website for compatibility information.

ii

Emissions Compliance, Radio Frequency Immunity, Safety and Agency Approvals

EMC Emissions

• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A Emission Requirements (USA)

EMC Immunity

• EN50130-4: 1996, Electromagnetic compatibility- Product family standard: Immunity requirements for components of fire, intruder, and social alarm systems.

System Type:Fire Alarm Control Panels

4100-9111, 4100-9112, 4100-9113, 4100-9121, 4100-9131, 4100-4100-9132, 4100-9133, 4100-9211, 4100-9230, 4100-9311, 4100-9314, 400-9331, 4100-9312, 4100-9313, 4100-9315, 4100-9316, 4100-9332, 4100-9511, 4100-9512, 4100-9513, 4100-9531, 4100-9532, 4100-9533, 4100-9534.

Transponders and Remote Annunciators4100-9600, 4100-9601, 4100-9610

Analog and Digital Audio Options4100-9620, 4100-9621

Network Display Units4100-9141, 4100-9142, 4100-9143, 4100-9144, 4100-9145, 4100-9146, 4100-9241, 4100-9242, 4100-9342, 4100-9352, 4100-9355, 4100-9542.

Manufacturer’s Name: Simplex Time Recorder Co., D/B/A TEPG-US

Manufacturer’s Address: 50 Technology DriveWestiminster MA 01441-0001United States of America.

iii

Listings, Approvals, Codes, and Standards

Listings and Approvals

This equipment meets the requirements of the following agencies.• UL (UL 864)• ULC (S527)• FM (Class No. 3010)• CSFM• MEA

Codes and Standards

If the notification appliances and accessories referenced in Table I are installed in accordance with either NFPA 12A or NFPA 2001, the system must employ an additional mechanically-operated manual release mechanism.

The installer should be familiar with the relevant codes listed below, as well as any other applicable local codes and standards, when installing a fire alarm system.

NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling CodeNFPA 11 Standard for Low-Expansion Foam and Combined Agent SystemsNFPA 11A Standard for Medium- and High-Expansion Foam SystemsNFPA 12 Standard for Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing SystemsNFPA 12A Standard on Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing SystemsNFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler SystemsNFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose SystemsNFPA 15 Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire ProtectionNFPA 16 Standard for the Installation of Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-

Water Spray SystemsNFPA 16A Standard for the Installation of Closed-Head Foam-Water Sprinkler SystemsNFPA 17 Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing SystemsNFPA 17A Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing SystemsNFPA 25 Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire

Protection SystemsNFPA 70 National Electric CodeNFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling CodeNFPA 101 Life Safety CodeNFPA 750 Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection SystemsNFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Protection SystemsULC S524 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems (Canadian Systems)UL 1076 Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

Environmental Operating Range

The 4100ES and all modules are rated to operate at ambient temperatures from 32oF - 120oF

(0oC - 49oC).

The 4100ES and all modules are rated for operation at 90oF (32oC), 93% RH (non-condensing).

7

Table of Contents

Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information ..................................................... iCopyright and Trademarks ....................................................................................... iEmissions Compliance, Radio Frequency Immunity, Safety and Agency Approvals iiListings, Approvals, Codes, and Standards............................................................. iiiListings and Approvals .............................................................................................iiiCodes and Standards ..............................................................................................iiiEnvironmental Operating Range .............................................................................iiiList of Figures ......................................................................................................... xvList of Tables ....................................................................................................... xviii

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System ............................. 1-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................1-1

In this chapter ......................................................................................................................1-1

System Configurations ................................................................................................... 1-2 Overview .............................................................................................................................1-2

Standalone Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-3Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-3System Design .....................................................................................................................1-3

MINIPLEX Configuration ................................................................................................. 1-4Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-4System Design .....................................................................................................................1-4

RUI Communication .............................................................................................................1-5

Network Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-6Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-6

Hub and Star Configurations ................................................................................................1-6

Connection Loops ................................................................................................................1-7System Design .....................................................................................................................1-7

Network Communication ......................................................................................................1-7

4100ES Back Box PIDs ................................................................................................... 1-8Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-8

4100ES Back Boxes ............................................................................................................1-8

4100ES PIDs ..................................................................................................................... 1-9Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-9

Basic Control Panels (United States) ...................................................................................1-9

Basic Control Panels (Canada) ..........................................................................................1-10

Basic Control Panels (International) ..................................................................................1-12Transponders .....................................................................................................................1-13

Remote Annunciator ..........................................................................................................1-13

Remote Display Assemblies ..............................................................................................1-14Basic Audio Selections ......................................................................................................1-14

Utility Cabinets ...................................................................................................................1-14

Master Controller Upgrade Kits ..........................................................................................1-14Rack Mount Kits .................................................................................................................1-15

Power Distribution Modules ...............................................................................................1-15

Expansion Bays .................................................................................................................1-15Expansion Battery Chargers for Basic FACPs ...................................................................1-15

Communication Modules ...................................................................................................1-15

Power Supplies ..................................................................................................................1-16Signaling Modules ..............................................................................................................1-16

Annunciator Modules .........................................................................................................1-17

8

Table of Contents

Transponders and Transponder Components ...................................................................1-17

Audio Operator Interfaces ..................................................................................................1-17Audio Controller Boards .....................................................................................................1-17

Telephones/Microphones ...................................................................................................1-18

Additional Audio Modules ..................................................................................................1-18Common Audio Options .....................................................................................................1-18

Amplifiers ...........................................................................................................................1-18

Miscellaneous Modules ......................................................................................................1-20

4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) .................................................................................... 1-21Overview ............................................................................................................................1-21

System Types and Options ................................................................................................1-21Master Controller Option Module .......................................................................................1-21

NAC Modules .....................................................................................................................1-22

IDC Modules ......................................................................................................................1-22Optional Modules ...............................................................................................................1-22

Auxiliary Relay Controls .....................................................................................................1-22

Audio Controllers and Amplifiers ........................................................................................1-23Audio Options ....................................................................................................................1-23

Annunciation Modules ........................................................................................................1-23

Miscellaneous Modules ......................................................................................................1-24Network Modules ...............................................................................................................1-24

System Accessories ...........................................................................................................1-24

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components ......................................................... 2-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................2-1In this chapter ......................................................................................................................2-1

Introduction to the FACP ................................................................................................2-2Overview ..............................................................................................................................2-2CPU Bay ..............................................................................................................................2-2

SPS CPU Bay Overview .................................................................................................. 2-3SPS CPU Master Motherboard ............................................................................................2-3Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ........................................................................2-4

Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs ...............................................................................2-5

Master Controller Switches ..................................................................................................2-5

System Power Supply (SPS) ...............................................................................................2-6

EPS CPU Bay Overview .................................................................................................. 2-7The Power Distribution Interface ..........................................................................................2-7

EPS CPU RUI+ Master Motherboard ..................................................................................2-7Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ........................................................................2-8

Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs ...............................................................................2-9

Master Controller Daughter Card Switches .........................................................................2-9Extended Power Supply with IDNet 2 ...............................................................................2-10

FACP Operator Interface ............................................................................................... 2-12Operator Interface ..............................................................................................................2-12

FACP Expansion Bays .................................................................................................. 2-13Additional CPU Bay Modules .............................................................................................2-13

Expansion Bays .................................................................................................................2-13

FACP Power Requirements .......................................................................................... 2-14System Power ....................................................................................................................2-14

9

Table of Contents

Power Requirements .........................................................................................................2-14

Overview ............................................................................................................................2-15Specifications .....................................................................................................................2-15

Mounting the Back Boxes ..................................................................................................2-16

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics ................................................................... 2-18Overview ............................................................................................................................2-18

Mounting the System Electronics Bays ..............................................................................2-18

Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional) ........................................................................ 2-21Trim Application .................................................................................................................2-21

Step 4. Mounting the Door ............................................................................................ 2-22Overview ............................................................................................................................2-22Attaching Doors ................................................................................................................2-23

Reversing the Door ...........................................................................................................2-24

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay ..................................................... 2-25Overview ............................................................................................................................2-25

4100ES CPU Bay Placement Guidelines ..........................................................................2-25

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ........................................................ 2-26Overview ............................................................................................................................2-26

4100ES Placement Guidelines ..........................................................................................2-26

Motherboard Placement Guidelines for a 4100ES bay ......................................................2-27Mixed 4100 Motherboard/4100ES 4”x5” Card Placement Guidelines ...............................2-28

Installing 4 X 5 Cards .........................................................................................................2-29

Installing Motherboards into a 4100ES Expansion Bay .....................................................2-30

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays ................................................................ 2-31Overview ............................................................................................................................2-31

Guidelines ..........................................................................................................................2-31Power Distribution Module Connections ............................................................................2-31

SPS CPU Card Interconnections in the CPU Bay .............................................................2-34

SPS CPU Card Interconnections in Expansion Bays ........................................................2-34SPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections ................................................................2-34

EPS CPU Bay Interconnections .........................................................................................2-36

EPS CPU Interconnections in Expansion Bays .................................................................2-36EPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections ..................................................................2-36

Connecting to 4100 Motherboards .....................................................................................2-37

Step 8. Configuring Cards ............................................................................................ 2-39Overview ............................................................................................................................2-39Master Motherboard Configuration ....................................................................................2-39

Master Controller Daughter Card Configuration ................................................................2-39

SPS Configuration .............................................................................................................2-40EPS Configuration .............................................................................................................2-40

PDI Configuration ...............................................................................................................2-40

Configuring Other Cards ....................................................................................................2-40

Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries .................................................................. 2-41Installing and Removing Batteries in a One Bay Cabinet ..................................................2-41

Installing and Removing Batteries in a Multi-Bay Cabinet .................................................2-42

Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures ......................................... 2-43System Power Up Procedure .............................................................................................2-43

System Power Down Procedure ........................................................................................2-43

The Terminal Block Utility Module ............................................................................... 2-44

10

Table of Contents

Overview ............................................................................................................................2-44

Mounting to the Electronics Bay ........................................................................................2-44

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components .................................... 3-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................3-1

In this chapter ......................................................................................................................3-1

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders ...................................................................... 3-2Overview ..............................................................................................................................3-2

Transponder Cabinets .........................................................................................................3-2

Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) and Audio Riser Modules ...........................................3-2Basic TICs ............................................................................................................................3-2

The Local Mode TIC ............................................................................................................3-3

TIC Audio Risers ..................................................................................................................3-3TIC Illustrations ....................................................................................................................3-4

Local Mode Specifications ...................................................................................................3-5

LEDs ....................................................................................................................................3-6Card Specifications ..............................................................................................................3-6

MINIPLEX System Guidelines ........................................................................................ 3-7Overview ..............................................................................................................................3-7Guidelines ............................................................................................................................3-7

Configuring Cards ........................................................................................................... 3-8Overview ..............................................................................................................................3-8TIC Configuration .................................................................................................................3-8

CPU Motherboard DIP Switch (SPS Configuration Only) ...................................................3-8

Configuring Other Cards ......................................................................................................3-8

TIC/Riser Mounting .......................................................................................................... 3-9Overview ..............................................................................................................................3-9

Mounting Instructions ...........................................................................................................3-9

TIC/Motherboard Interconnections .............................................................................. 3-10Interconnections .................................................................................................................3-10

RUI Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 3-11Overview ............................................................................................................................3-11

RUI/RUI+ Specifications ....................................................................................................3-11

Wiring Configurations .........................................................................................................3-11

MINIPLEX Audio Wiring ................................................................................................ 3-12Overview ............................................................................................................................3-12

Analog Interconnections ....................................................................................................3-12

Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller) ...........................................3-13

Chapter 4 Networking ........................................................................................ 4-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................4-1

In this chapter ......................................................................................................................4-1

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card .......................................................... 4-2Overview ..............................................................................................................................4-2

Network Module Illustrations ................................................................................................4-3

NIC Card LED Indications ....................................................................................................4-34100 Motherboard Options ..................................................................................................4-4

NIC Card Modules ...............................................................................................................4-5

Requirements and Limitations .............................................................................................4-6

11

Table of Contents

Step 1. Configuring Network Cards ............................................................................... 4-7Overview ..............................................................................................................................4-7

Motherboard Jumper Settings ..............................................................................................4-7

NIC Card Address Setting ....................................................................................................4-7NIC Card Jumper Settings ...................................................................................................4-7

Wired Media Card Jumper Settings .....................................................................................4-7

Modem Media Card Jumper Settings ..................................................................................4-8Fiber Media Jumper Settings (746-109 only) .......................................................................4-8

Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC ..................................................................... 4-9Overview ..............................................................................................................................4-9Media Card Mounting ...........................................................................................................4-9

Step 3. Mounting Network Cards .................................................................................4-10Daughter Card Installing ....................................................................................................4-10

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards ...................................................................................... 4-11Overview ............................................................................................................................4-11

Wiring Guidelines ...............................................................................................................4-11Wiring Distances ................................................................................................................4-12

Related Documentation .....................................................................................................4-12

Fiber-Optic Wiring ..............................................................................................................4-13Fiber Optic Connection Types ...........................................................................................4-13

4190-9010 Coupler Requirements .....................................................................................4-14

Wiring with the Wired Media Card .....................................................................................4-15Modem Guidelines .............................................................................................................4-17

Modem Wiring ....................................................................................................................4-17

Wiring Illustrations ..............................................................................................................4-18Wired Media Style 7 Wiring ................................................................................................4-18

Fiber Optic Style 7 Wiring ..................................................................................................4-19

Wired Media and Fiber Optic Style 7 Wiring ......................................................................4-20Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only) .............................................................4-21

Network Audio Wiring ................................................................................................... 4-22Head-End Audio Network Configuration ............................................................................4-22Locations on the Network Audio Riser Controller Module .................................................4-22

Card Specifications ............................................................................................................4-23

Analog Interconnections ....................................................................................................4-24

Digital Interconnections for the 4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller ..................................4-25Distributed Microphone Interconnections ...........................................................................4-26

Reference for MCC DARIC Installation ..............................................................................4-26

Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug ............................................................................. 4-27Overview ............................................................................................................................4-27

Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug .................................................................4-27

Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS) .................................................... 5-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................5-1In this chapter ......................................................................................................................5-1

SPS Specifications .......................................................................................................... 5-2Input/Output/Battery Specifications ......................................................................................5-2SPS Current Consumption ...................................................................................................5-3

SPS Configuration ........................................................................................................... 5-4Overview ..............................................................................................................................5-4

12

Table of Contents

Jumper Settings ...................................................................................................................5-4

Setting the Device Address ..................................................................................................5-4

SPS LED Indications ....................................................................................................... 5-5LEDs ....................................................................................................................................5-5

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 5-6Overview ..............................................................................................................................5-6

IDNet Power Monitor Trouble ..............................................................................................5-6

Extra Device .........................................................................................................................5-6Class A Trouble ...................................................................................................................5-6

Earth Fault Search ...............................................................................................................5-6

Short Circuit .........................................................................................................................5-6Channel Fail .........................................................................................................................5-6

No Answer/Bad Answer .......................................................................................................5-6

Output Abnormal ..................................................................................................................5-6

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring ................................................................ 6-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................6-1

In this chapter ......................................................................................................................6-1

General Field Wiring Guidelines .................................................................................... 6-2General Guidelines ..............................................................................................................6-2

Power-Limited Guidelines ....................................................................................................6-3

Power Supply Wiring Distances ..................................................................................... 6-5Overview ..............................................................................................................................6-5

Class A NAC Wiring Table ...................................................................................................6-5

Class B NAC Wiring Table ...................................................................................................6-6

SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines .................................................................................. 6-7Guidelines ............................................................................................................................6-7

SPS NAC Wiring .............................................................................................................. 6-8Class A NAC Wiring .............................................................................................................6-8

Class B NAC Wiring .............................................................................................................6-9

SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines .............................................................................. 6-10IDNet Wiring .......................................................................................................................6-10

Guidelines ..........................................................................................................................6-10

SPS IDNet Wiring ........................................................................................................... 6-11Class A Wiring ...................................................................................................................6-11Class B Wiring ...................................................................................................................6-12

SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring ......................................................................................... 6-13Guidelines ..........................................................................................................................6-13Wiring .................................................................................................................................6-14

SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring .......................................................................................... 6-15Guidelines ..........................................................................................................................6-15Wiring .................................................................................................................................6-15

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2 ............................................................................... 7-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................7-1

In this chapter ......................................................................................................................7-1

EPS Specifications .......................................................................................................... 7-2Card Specifications ..............................................................................................................7-2

13

Table of Contents

EPS Configuration ........................................................................................................... 7-3Setting the EPS Address .....................................................................................................7-3

Earth Connect Jumper .........................................................................................................7-4

Battery Disconnect Jumper ..................................................................................................7-4

EPS IDNet 2 Configuration .............................................................................................. 7-5Setting the Address ..............................................................................................................7-5

Connections ..................................................................................................................... 7-6Connection to the Power Distribution Module ......................................................................7-6

Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 7-7LED Trouble Indicator Overview ..........................................................................................7-7System Trouble LED Codes ................................................................................................7-7

SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes .......................................................................................7-8

Trouble Messages ...............................................................................................................7-9

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring ................................................................... 8-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................8-1

In this chapter ......................................................................................................................8-1

EPS Wiring Overview ...................................................................................................... 8-2General Wiring Guidelines ...................................................................................................8-2

Power-Limited Guidelines ....................................................................................................8-2

EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring ............................................................................................. 8-3Wiring Overview ...................................................................................................................8-3

IDNAC Wiring Guidelines .....................................................................................................8-3

IDNAC Speaker Wiring Application Guidelines ....................................................................8-3Ferrite Beads .......................................................................................................................8-4

EPS Wiring Tables ........................................................................................................... 8-5Class B Wiring Tables ..........................................................................................................8-5

EPS Wiring to Devices .................................................................................................... 8-7Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices .......................................................................................8-7

4009 IDNAC Repeater .........................................................................................................8-7Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) ...............................................................................................8-7

Calculating Class B wiring with Isolators .............................................................................8-8

EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring ........................................................................................... 8-9AUX/ NAC Terminal .............................................................................................................8-9

IDNet 2 Card Wiring ....................................................................................................... 8-10Wiring Overview .................................................................................................................8-10

Wiring Parameters .............................................................................................................8-10Class A Wiring ...................................................................................................................8-11

Class B Wiring ...................................................................................................................8-12

Chapter 9 PC Software Connections ............................................................... 9-1Introduction ..........................................................................................................................9-1In this chapter ......................................................................................................................9-1

Software Modes ............................................................................................................... 9-2Software Modes ...................................................................................................................9-2

Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port .............................................................. 9-4Ethernet Service Port Overview (0566-719 only) .................................................................9-4

Serial Service Port Overview ...............................................................................................9-4

14

Table of Contents

Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application .................................................................. 10-1Introduction ........................................................................................................................10-1

In this chapter ....................................................................................................................10-1

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System ................................. 10-2General Information ...........................................................................................................10-2

Hierarchy of Operator Interfaces ........................................................................................10-2

Priority of Signals ...............................................................................................................10-3Overriding Fire Alarm Signals ............................................................................................10-3

Timing Equations ...............................................................................................................10-4

Appliance Control Equations ..............................................................................................10-4Public Accessible Panic Switches ......................................................................................10-4

Programming and Configuration .................................................................................10-5Programming the 4100ES to Meet MNS Requirements ....................................................10-5Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU .........................................................................10-5

Access and Security Information for the 4100ES System .................................................10-6

Voice Control Centers ........................................................................................................10-6Configuration Limitations ...................................................................................................10-6

Amber Strobes ...................................................................................................................10-7

MNS Wiring ........................................................................................................................10-7

Appendix A The Device Configuration DIP Switch .........................................A-1Overview ............................................................................................................................. A-1

The Service Port ............................................................................................................. A-2Overview ............................................................................................................................. A-2

Chapter B Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U) ............B-1Introduction ......................................................................................................................... B-1In this chapter ..................................................................................................................... B-1

Introduction to FACPs .................................................................................................... B-2Overview ............................................................................................................................. B-2Master Controller Bay ......................................................................................................... B-2

Master Motherboards and Controllers ................................................................................ B-3

Universal Power Supply (UPS) ........................................................................................... B-5

Operator Interface ............................................................................................................... B-6Additional CPU Bay Modules .............................................................................................. B-6

Expansion Bays .................................................................................................................. B-6

System Power ..................................................................................................................... B-7

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes ....................................................................................... B-8Overview ............................................................................................................................. B-8

Specifications ...................................................................................................................... B-8Installing the Back Box(es) ................................................................................................. B-9

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes ................................................... B-10Overview ........................................................................................................................... B-10Installing the System Electronics Bays ............................................................................. B-10

Step 3. Configuring Modules ....................................................................................... B-14Overview ........................................................................................................................... B-14Master Motherboard Configuration ................................................................................... B-14

565-333 Master Controller Configuration .......................................................................... B-14

565-148 Master Controller Configuration .......................................................................... B-15

15

Table of Contents

UPS Configuration ............................................................................................................ B-15

Configuring Other Cards ................................................................................................... B-16

Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards .............................................. B-17Overview ........................................................................................................................... B-17

Interconnecting Cards ....................................................................................................... B-17

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays .............................................. B-18Overview ........................................................................................................................... B-18

Guidelines ......................................................................................................................... B-18Installing Motherboards ..................................................................................................... B-18

Connecting the 733-525 Harness ..................................................................................... B-19

Chapter C Installing 4100 MINIPLEX Components (Non-4100ES/4100U) ....C-1Introduction ......................................................................................................................... C-1In this chapter ..................................................................................................................... C-1

Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems ............................................................................... C-2Overview ............................................................................................................................. C-2

MINIPLEX System Components .................................................................................... C-4Overview ............................................................................................................................. C-4

The RUI Card ...................................................................................................................... C-4Transponder Cabinets ........................................................................................................ C-4

The Remote Interface Card (RIC) ....................................................................................... C-5

MINIPLEX System Guidelines ....................................................................................... C-6Overview ............................................................................................................................. C-6

Guidelines ........................................................................................................................... C-6

Installing Modules into Back Boxes ............................................................................. C-7Overview ............................................................................................................................. C-7

Guidelines ........................................................................................................................... C-7

Installing the RUI Motherboard ........................................................................................... C-7Installing the RIC II Motherboard ........................................................................................ C-8

Connecting the 733-525 Harness ....................................................................................... C-9

MINIPLEX Wiring .......................................................................................................... C-11Overview ........................................................................................................................... C-11

Wiring Configurations ........................................................................................................ C-11

Class A Wiring .................................................................................................................. C-11

Class B Wiring .................................................................................................................. C-11Wiring Illustration .............................................................................................................. C-12

Appendix D Checking System Wiring ..............................................................D-1Overview ............................................................................................................................. D-1

Using the Volt/ Ohm Meter .................................................................................................. D-1

Checking System Wiring ............................................................................................... D-2Meter Readings ................................................................................................................... D-2

Appendix E References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions ...........E-1Overview ............................................................................................................................. E-1

Appendix F Labels .............................................................................................F-1

16

Table of Contents

Appendix G Earth Fault Diagnostics ............................................................... G-1Overview .............................................................................................................................G-1In this chapter .....................................................................................................................G-1

General Guidelines ......................................................................................................... G-2General Guidelines .............................................................................................................G-2

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel ................................................................ G-3Overview .............................................................................................................................G-3

Access Level Selection .......................................................................................................G-3Starting the Earth Fault Search ...........................................................................................G-3

Search Option A: Select Location .......................................................................................G-4

Search Option B: Select Channel .......................................................................................G-5Search Option C: Last Search Result .................................................................................G-5

Completing the Search .......................................................................................................G-5

Search Results ................................................................................................................ G-6Overview .............................................................................................................................G-6

Non-Point Faults .................................................................................................................G-6

Point Faults .........................................................................................................................G-6Fault Not Found ..................................................................................................................G-7

No Fault ..............................................................................................................................G-7

Result Not Available ............................................................................................................G-7

Earth Fault Search Example .......................................................................................... G-8Earth Fault Search Example ...............................................................................................G-8

Appendix H Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories ........................................................................................................H-1

Appendix I EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices ..................................... I-1EPS Compatible Devices ......................................................................................................I-1EPS Compatible Appliances .................................................................................................I-1

Appendix J Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications ................................................................... J-1

Overview ..............................................................................................................................J-1

Synchronizing Horn Strobes ................................................................................................J-1Synchronizing strobes ..........................................................................................................J-2

Appliances with synchronizing strobes ................................................................................J-3

Synchronizing horns ............................................................................................................J-4Coded audible appliances ....................................................................................................J-5

Non-synchronizing appliances .............................................................................................J-5

Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm K-1Overview ............................................................................................................................. K-1

Compatible Audio System Components ............................................................................. K-1Compatible Notification Appliances .................................................................................... K-2

Audio Options Alongside Compatible Equipment ............................................................... K-3

17

Figure 1-1. Standalone 4100ES System.............................................................................. 1-3Figure 1-2. MINIPLEX 4100ES System .............................................................................. 1-5Figure 1-3. Hub/Ring Configuration .................................................................................... 1-6Figure 1-4. Interconnected Loop Configuration................................................................... 1-7Figure 2-1. The CPU Bay..................................................................................................... 2-2Figure 2-2. Master Motherboard (566-227)......................................................................... 2-3Figure 2-3. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ..................................................... 2-4Figure 2-4. System Power Supply (566-071) ...................................................................... 2-6Figure 2-5. The Power Distribution Interface (PDI) ............................................................. 2-7Figure 2-6. RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)....................................................... 2-7Figure 2-7. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ..................................................... 2-8Figure 2-8. EPS with IDNet 2 (566-872) ........................................................................... 2-10Figure 2-9. IDNet 2 Card................................................................................................... 2-11Figure 2-10. Operator Interface......................................................................................... 2-12Figure 2-11. Flexible User Interface.................................................................................. 2-12Figure 2-12. Expansion Bays ............................................................................................ 2-13Figure 2-13. System Power............................................................................................... 2-14Figure 2-14. Back Box Installation Diagram...................................................................... 2-16Figure 2-15. Back Box side views (plastic and metal doors).............................................. 2-17Figure 2-16. Removing the Shipping Studs ...................................................................... 2-18Figure 2-17. Mounting the PDM Bracket (2-Bay Box Shown)........................................... 2-19Figure 2-18. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly .......................................... 2-20Figure 2-19. Semi-Flush Trim Kit ...................................................................................... 2-21Figure 2-20. Applying the Trim.......................................................................................... 2-21Figure 2-21. Front and Back View of a Glass Door........................................................... 2-22Figure 2-22. Front and Back view of a Solid Door ............................................................ 2-22Figure 2-23. Reversing the Lock Catch............................................................................. 2-23Figure 2-24. Securing the Dress Panel ............................................................................. 2-23Figure 2-25. Hinge Pin Alignment ..................................................................................... 2-23Figure 2-26. The Ground Wire .......................................................................................... 2-24Figure 2-27. CPU Bay Card Placement ............................................................................ 2-25Figure 2-28. Expansion Bay 4” X 5” Card Placement ....................................................... 2-26Figure 2-29. Expansion Bay Motherboard Placement ...................................................... 2-27Figure 2-30. Mixed Module Placement ............................................................................. 2-28Figure 2-31. Slave Card/PDI Connection.......................................................................... 2-29Figure 2-32. Installing the Motherboard in a 4100ES Expansion Bay............................... 2-30Figure 2-33. Wiring Looped Through Ferrite Bead ........................................................... 2-31Figure 2-34. FACP Power Supply Assembly Connector (EPS shown)............................. 2-32Figure 2-35. XPS/PDM Connection .................................................................................. 2-33Figure 2-36. Bay-to-Bay Interconnections......................................................................... 2-34Figure 2-37. Basic CPU Interconnections ......................................................................... 2-37Figure 2-38. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards ................................... 2-38Figure 2-39. One Bay Battery Installation ......................................................................... 2-41Figure 2-40. Multi-Bay Battery Installation ........................................................................ 2-42Figure 2-41. Terminal Block Utility Module Mounting........................................................ 2-44Figure 3-1. Transponder Interface Cards............................................................................. 3-4Figure 3-2. TIC Mounting .................................................................................................... 3-9Figure 3-3. Transponder Cabinet Interconnections........................................................... 3-10Figure 3-4. Loop Wire Through Ferrite Bead as Shown ................................................... 3-11Figure 3-5. TIC Wiring to the Host Panel .......................................................................... 3-11Figure 3-6. Analog Audio Interconnections ....................................................................... 3-12Figure 3-7. Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller) ........................ 3-13Figure 4-1. 4100-6014 Network Interface Card.................................................................... 4-3Figure 4-2. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274) ............................................. 4-4Figure 4-3. UT Motherboard without City Connection (565-275) ........................................ 4-4Figure 4-4. The 4100/4120-0143/ 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card............................... 4-5Figure 4-5. The 4100/4120-0142 Wired Media Card (565-413).......................................... 4-5Figure 4-6. The 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338).............................. 4-6Figure 4-7. Media Card Mounting ....................................................................................... 4-9Figure 4-8. Installing the Daughter Card ........................................................................... 4-10Figure 4-9. The Transient Suppressor .............................................................................. 4-12Figure 4-10. Fiber Wiring .................................................................................................. 4-13Figure 4-11. Coupler Wiring .............................................................................................. 4-15

List of Figures

18

Figure 4-12. Wired Media Interconnections Between 4100ES Motherboards .................. 4-16Figure 4-13. Modem Wiring............................................................................................... 4-17Figure 4-14. Wired Media, Style 7 Wiring ......................................................................... 4-18Figure 4-15. Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring ............................................................................ 4-19Figure 4-16. Wired Media and Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring................................................ 4-20Figure 4-17. Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)........................................ 4-21Figure 4-18. Network Audio Riser Controller Module........................................................ 4-22Figure 4-19. Analog Audio Interconnections ..................................................................... 4-24Figure 4-20. Digital Audio Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)............ 4-25Figure 4-21. Distributed Microphone Interconnections ..................................................... 4-26Figure 4-22. Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug ............................................ 4-27Figure 6-1. Power-Limited Wiring......................................................................................... 6-3Figure 6-2. The EOL Relay ................................................................................................. 6-4Figure 6-3. Class A NAC Wiring.......................................................................................... 6-8Figure 6-4. Class B Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-9Figure 6-5. Loop Wiring as Shown.................................................................................... 6-10Figure 6-6 . Class A Wiring ............................................................................................... 6-11Figure 6-7. Class B Wiring ................................................................................................ 6-12Figure 6-8. Auxiliary Power Wiring.................................................................................... 6-14Figure 6-9. Auxiliary Relay Wiring..................................................................................... 6-15Figure 7-1. EPS Card Layout .............................................................................................. 7-2Figure 7-2. DIP Switch SW2 ............................................................................................... 7-3Figure 7-3. Earth Connect Jumper Positions ...................................................................... 7-4Figure 7-4. Battery Disconnect Jumper Positions ............................................................... 7-4Figure 7-5. DIP Switch SW1 ............................................................................................... 7-5Figure 7-6. PDM/Battery Connections ................................................................................ 7-6Figure 7-7. LED Location .................................................................................................... 7-7Figure 8-1. Power-Limited Wiring Guidelines...................................................................... 8-2Figure 8-2. Ferrite Bead Installation.................................................................................... 8-4Figure 8-3. Class B Wiring .................................................................................................. 8-7Figure 8-4. Class B Wiring With Isolators ........................................................................... 8-8Figure 8-5. AUX/NAC Terminal........................................................................................... 8-9Figure 8-6. Simple NAC Wiring ........................................................................................... 8-9Figure 8-7. Class A Jumper Setting .................................................................................. 8-11Figure 8-8. IDNet 2 Class A Wiring ................................................................................... 8-11Figure 8-9. Class B Jumper Setting .................................................................................. 8-12Figure 8-10. IDNet 2 Class B Wiring ................................................................................. 8-12Figure 9-1. Service and Diagnostic Interface ....................................................................... 9-2Figure 9-2. Data Transfer Interface..................................................................................... 9-2Figure 9-3. Bootloader Interface ......................................................................................... 9-3Figure 9-4. CPU card ports ................................................................................................. 9-4Figure 9-5. Front Panel Ethernet Service Port .................................................................... 9-4Figure 10-1. Supervisory and Trouble LEDs for both MNS and Fire ................................. 10-5Figure 10-2. Voice Message Configuration Example........................................................ 10-6Figure A-1. DIP Switch SWx ................................................................................................ A-1Figure B-1. Master Controller Bay (4100) ............................................................................ B-2Figure B-2. UT Motherboard (565-161)............................................................................... B-3Figure B-3. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-213)............................................. B-3Figure B-4. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)............................................. B-3Figure B-5. UT Master Controller (565-333) ....................................................................... B-4Figure B-6. UT Master Controller (565-148) ....................................................................... B-4Figure B-7. Universal Power Supply ................................................................................... B-5Figure B-8. Operator Interface ............................................................................................ B-6Figure B-9. Master Controller and Expansion Bays ............................................................ B-6Figure B-10. Power and Comm Lines ................................................................................. B-7Figure B-11. Back Box Installation Diagram ....................................................................... B-9Figure B-12. Removing the Shipping Studs ...................................................................... B-10Figure B-13. Inserting the Mounting Screws..................................................................... B-11Figure B-14. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly.......................................... B-12Figure B-15. Master Controller Bay Interconnections ....................................................... B-17Figure B-16. Installing the Motherboard in an Expansion Bay .......................................... B-18Figure B-17. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards................................... B-20Figure C-1. MINIPLEX System Design ................................................................................C-3

List of Figures

19

Figure C-2. The Remote Unit Interface Card ...................................................................... C-4Figure C-3. The RIC II Card ................................................................................................ C-5Figure C-4. Installing the RUI Motherboard in the CPU Bay............................................... C-7Figure C-5. Installing the RIC II Motherboard into a 4100 Expansion Bay.......................... C-8Figure C-6. Power and Communication Wiring for the Transponder Cabinet (4100) ....... C-10Figure C-7. MINIPLEX Wiring ........................................................................................... C-12Figure G-1. Earth Fault Example .........................................................................................G-8

List of Figures

20

Table 2-1. CPU Components ..............................................................................................2-2Table 2-2. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs ....................................................................2-5Table 2-3. Master Controller Switches ................................................................................2-5Table 2-4. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs ....................................................................2-9Table 2-5. Master Controller Switches ................................................................................2-9Table 2-6. Power Requirements ........................................................................................2-14Table 2-7. Contents of the Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit ....................................2-15Table 2-8. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware ...............................................2-18Table 3-1.TIC Specifications ...............................................................................................3-6Table 4-1. Electrical and Environmental Specifications .......................................................4-6Table 4-2. Wiring Distances ..............................................................................................4-12Table 4-3. Dual Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples ..........................4-14Table 4-4. Single Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples* ......................4-14Table 4-5. CPU Motherboard Wired Media Connections ..................................................4-16Table 4-6. Network Audio Riser Controller Specifications .................................................4-23Table 5-1. Input and Output Specifications .........................................................................5-2Table 5-2. SPS Current Specifications ................................................................................5-3Table 6-1. Class A Wiring Distances ...................................................................................6-5Table 6-2. Class B Wiring Distances ...................................................................................6-6Table 7-1. Card Specifications ............................................................................................7-2Table 7-2. EPS Card Addresses .........................................................................................7-3Table 7-3. 4100-3109 Card Addresses ...............................................................................7-5Table 7-4. The 8 EPS indicator LEDs. ................................................................................7-7Table 7-5. System Trouble LED Codes ...............................................................................7-7Table 7-6. SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes .....................................................................7-8Table 7-7. EPS Trouble Messages ......................................................................................7-9Table 8-1. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Alarm Current .........................................................8-5Table 8-2. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Communication ......................................................8-5Table 8-3. Ohms per 1000 ft ................................................................................................8-5Table 8-4. UTP Wiring Limit for Speakers and Speaker/Visible devices based on Communication 8-6Table 8-5. AUX/NAC Wiring Specification ...........................................................................8-9Table 8-6. NAC Wiring Limits ..............................................................................................8-9Table 8-7. IDNet 2 Card Wiring Parameters ......................................................................8-10Table 10-1. Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU .....................................................10-5Table A-1. Card Addresses ................................................................................................ A-2Table B-1. Back Box Specifications .................................................................................... B-8Table B-2. Contents of the Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit ............................................ B-8Table B-3. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware .............................................. B-12Table B-4. UPS SW1 Battery Configurations ................................................................... B-15Table D-1. Acceptable Zone and Signal Circuit Meter Readings ....................................... D-2Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions .................................... E-1Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories H-1Table I-1. Compatible Devices ............................................................................................. I-1Table I-2. Compatible Appliances ......................................................................................... I-1Table J-1. Synchronizing Horn Strobes ............................................................................... J-1Table J-2. Synchronizing strobes ........................................................................................ J-2Table J-3. Appliances with synchronizing strobes ............................................................... J-3Table J-4. Synchronizing horns ........................................................................................... J-4Table J-5. Coded audible appliances .................................................................................. J-5Table J-6. Non-synchronizing appliances ............................................................................ J-5Table K-1. Compatible Audio System Components ........................................................... K-1Table K-2. Compatible Notification Appliances .................................................................. K-2Table K-3. Audio Options That May Be Configured Alongside Compatible Equipment ..... K-3

List of Tables

1-1

Chapter 1

Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

Introduction The 4100ES is an expandable fire alarm system that can be used as a standalone system with one host panel, or as a wide-ranging system with several remote back boxes, with or without multiple host panels. This chapter is an overview of standalone, MINIPLEX®, and network 4100ES system concepts.

Two types of 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) configurations are described in this manual:

• The “SPS configuration”, which refers to FACPS that use a System Power Supply (SPS) card as the FACP’s Central Processing Unit’s (CPU) powers supply.

• The “EPS configuration”, which refers to FACPS that have an Extended Power Supply (EPS) module fitted with an IDNET 2 card as the CPU FACP power supply

References to “non-4100ES/4100U”, “Legacy 4100”, “4120”, or “4020” throughout the manual are for retrofit applications only.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

System configurations 1-2

Standalone configuration 1-3

MINIPLEX configuration 1-4

Network configuration 1-6

4100ES Back Box PIDs 1-8

4100ES PIDs 1-9

4100 PIDs (non-4100ES/4100U) 1-21

1-2

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

System configurations

Overview The 4100ES is available as a standalone system with one host panel, or as an expansive system with several remote back boxes, with or without multiple host panels. The type of configuration used depends on the size of the site into which it is being installed.

The following types of configurations are offered:

Standalone. Comprised of one FACP and its assorted notification appliances, initiating devices, and signaling line circuit devices.

MINIPLEX. A standalone system plus remote transponder cabinets, which allow for additional slave modules to be used. Typically used for multi-level buildings and small multi-building applications.

Network. A multi-FACP system connected by network cards. Each panel maintains the status and control of its own circuit points while monitoring and controlling activity at other locations. Network nodes may perform similar tasks, or may be dedicated to specific functions.

This chapter outlines the fundamental concepts of each configuration

1-3

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

Standalone configuration

Overview The standalone version of the 4100ES is used for smaller or single-building applications. A standalone system is ideally placed into a small building that requires a limited number of notification appliances and initiating devices.

If a small building is being expanded, or if other buildings are being constructed in the same general area (as in a campus application), the standalone 4100ES can be expanded into one of the larger systems described later..

System design The standalone 4100ES uses one FACP (one, two, or three bays) containing the following:

• Central Processing Unit (CPU)

• System Power Supply for the 4100ES FACP (Universal Power Supply for 4100 Legacy Upgrade)

• Optional slave cards

All appliances and devices are connected to that one FACP, as shown in Figure 1-1.

Figure 1-1. Standalone 4100ES system

ALARMFIRE

PULL DOWN

Addressablestation

Monitor, signal, andRelay IAMs

Supervised IAM

TrueAlarm smokesensor with base

Remote linepowered isolator

To additional IDNet devices, up to 250 total

TrueAlarm thermalsensor with base

to Device(s)

to Device- IDNET IN ++IDNET IN -

SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO.

4090-9101MONITOR ZAM, CLASS B

INSTAL. INSTR. 574-183

DATE CODE:

1

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

1234

5678

+ 24V0V

+IDNET- IDNET

ZONE PWR +ZONE PWR -IDC +IDC -

Press ACK located under flashing indicator.Repeat operation unti l all events are acknowledged.Local tone wil l silence .

A B C

AC Power

D E F G H I

J K L M N O P Q R

'SP' ( ) , 0 :

S T U V W X Y Z /

ALARMSFire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm

SYSTEM WARNINGSSupervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced

Emergency Operating InstructionsAlarm or Warning Condition

How to Acknowledge / View Events

How to Silence Building SignalsSystem indicator flashing. Tone On. Press Alarm Silence.

How to Reset SystemPress System Reset.Press Ack to silence tone device.

ZONE

1SI G

2AUX

3

FB4

IO5

I DNe t6

P7

A8

L9

NET ADDR0 DEL

Enter C/Exit

Fire AlarmAck

Priority 2Ack

SupvAck

TroubleAck

AlarmSilence

SystemReset

EventTime

Enable OnArm

Disable OffDisarm Auto Lamp

Test

MoreInfo

Menu

Previous

Next

SYSTEM IS NORMAL08:23:43 am MON 11-DEC-00

Fire Control

1-4

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

MINIPLEX configuration

Overview The MINIPLEX version of the 4100ES Fire Alarm System, which is designed for moderately larger applications than the standalone configuration, allows up to 2000 monitor and/or control points and 2000 annunciator points to be controlled by a single FACP.

Like the standalone system, only one CPU is used. Remote Unit Interface (RUI) data and power is distributed from the host panel to remote boxes called transponder cabinets. The exact system design varies, depending on whether the system is a 4100 or a 4100ES:

• 4100ES: Transponder interface cards (TICs), located in transponder cabinets, take the RUI data and power directly from the CPU motherboard and distribute it to modules nearby, thereby expanding the system’s status from standalone to MINIPLEX.

• 4100: Remote interface cards (RICs), located in transponder cabinets, take the RUI data and power from the remote unit interface (RUI) card in the host panel and distribute it to modules nearby, thereby expanding the system’s status from standalone to MINIPLEX.

System design The MINIPLEX 4100ES FACP must contain the following:

• CPU

• System Power Supply for the 4100ES (Universal Power Supply for 4100 Legacy Upgrade)

• 4100 only (non-4100ES/4100U): Remote unit interface (RUI) Card

• Optional slave cards

Each transponder cabinet, meanwhile, must contain a Transponder Interface Card (TIC) and any number of optional slave cards.

1-5

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

MINIPLEX configuration (continued)

RUI communication 4100ES power and data from the CPU may have to be routed over long distances in a MINIPLEX system. An RUI line, routed from either the CPU in the 4100ES or the RUI card in the 4100ES, allows the power and data to travel longer distances. Once the RUI line terminates at a remote box, the TIC (4100ES) or RIC (4100) at that box distributes the CPU’s power and data to the remote modules.

Figure 1-2 outlines this process in a typical 4100ES MINIPLEX setup.

Figure 1-2. MINIPLEX 4100ES system

4100ES

RUI Risers - 4 MAX (same channel)(from CPU Motherboard or Remote

Unit Interface Card)

Digital Audio Riser(from Digital Audio Controller)

Analog Audio Risers - 2MAX(from Analog Audio Controller)

FF Telephone Riser(from Phone Controller)

Transponders may be locatedfurther apart (within the 2500'

limit) as called for by theapplication requirements.

Risers from 4100ES toRemote Transponders

RUIAnalog Audio

Digital Audio (DAR)FF Telephone

Shown wired as Style 7(Style 4 also supported)

9th FloorTransponderUnit

6th FloorTransponderUnit

3rd FloorTransponderUnit

RUI I/F Slave

Slave Slave

RUI I/F Slave

Slave Slave

RUI I/F Slave

Slave Slave

Note:Although not shown, nestedRUI is supported up to onelevel deep.

1-6

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

Network configuration

Overview The 4100ES can be expanded to a network system by using network interface cards (NICs). When a NIC is installed into a 4100ES host panel, it is used to connect to up to 98 other network nodes. Nodes may consist of other host 4100ES panels, or they may be completely different: 4010 FACPs, TrueSite® Workstation, and Voice Command Centers (VCCs) are all examples of what could be used as nodes. A node is a self-sufficient CPU that controls appliances and devices, which also has the capability of controlling and communicating with other nodes.

The network configuration supports two prevalent architectures, or wiring configurations: hub or ring, or star. A networked system can also use a combination of the two.

Hub and star configurations

The hub configuration consists of a main loop with nodes connected in a radial manner. The star configuration consists of several nodes connected directly to one common node. Physical bridge cards are used for the star configuration. Physical bridges reduce the amount of wire that would otherwise be needed to connect all nodes in a loop, and therefore cut down on system response time. A combination of the two styles is illustrated in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3. Hub/Ring configuration

Ring Topology Network,

Style 7/Class A

Star Topology Connections

TrueSite Workstation

Hub Node, 4100ES

Fire Control

Fire Control

4100/4120 Panel

4100U Panel

1-7

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

Network configuration (continued)

Connection loops Network loops can be joined via physical bridge cards. There may be no more than two Style 7 network loops (two hub configurations) connected in tandem. For every two loops that are interconnected (using one physical bridge), there can be a maximum of three physical bridges used in a star configuration. See Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4. Interconnected loop configuration

System design To be used as a network node, a 4100ES panel must contain the following:

• CPU

• System Power Supply

• 4100 Network Interface Card

• Optional slave cards

Network communication

Network communication is achieved via the 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC). Each network node requires a NIC. Once the FACP is a network node, it may be programmed to be fully in control of other nodes, or to be fully passive, or anywhere in between.

OverviewThis section lists all back box PIDS for the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.

Remote Loop

Physical Bridge Link

Local Loop

Physical Bridging(Star Configuration)

TrueSite Workstation

Physical Bridge Link

Physical Bridge Links

Hub Node

HubNode

Remote Node

Fire ControlFire Control

TrueSite Workstation

Fire Control

Fire Control Fire Control

Fire Control

1 2 3

Up to Four Network Loops can be connected using 3 Physical Bridges

Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4

1-8

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES Back Box PIDs

Overview This section lists all back box PIDS for the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.

4100ES Back Boxes

The 4100ES Back Boxes are shipped as follows:

Box and door enclosures:2975-9441 One Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panels – Red (743-934)

2975-9442 Two-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-935)

2975-9443 Three-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-936)

2975-9444 One-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-937)

2975-9445 Two-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-938)

2975-9446 Three-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-939)

2975-9447 One-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-940)

2975-9448 Two-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-941)

2975-9449 Three-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-942)

2975-9450 One-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-943)

2975-9451 Two-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-944)

2975-9452 Three-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-945)

Doors and Dress Panels:4100-2104 One-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-950)

4100-2105 Two-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-951)

4100-2106 Three-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-952)

4100-2114 One-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-953)

4100-2115 Two-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-954)

4100-2116 Three-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-955)

4100-2124 One-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-956)

4100-2125 Two-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-957)

4100-2126 Three-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-958)

4100-2134 One-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-959)

4100-2135 Two-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-960)

4100-2136 Three-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-961)

Back Boxes by themselves:2975-9407 One-Bay Red Box (742-414)

2975-9408 Two-Bay Red Box (742-416)

2975-9409 Three-Bay Red Box (742-418)

2975-9438 One-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-946)

2975-9439 Two-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-947)

2975-9440 Three-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-948)

Accessories:2975-9812 Red Trim Band (742-638)

2975-9813 Semi-Flush Trim Band – Platinum (743-949)

1-9

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs

Overview This section lists the PIDs (model numbers) that are supported by the 4100ES Fire Alarm System. There are two basic types of PIDs listed here:

• PIDs denoting standard installations, such as host panels containing multiple, already functioning modules

• PIDs denoting individual modules or back boxes

- offered as an after-market product for standard installations- offered as options or aftermarket product for configured installations

The 4100ES features either a 2x40 alphanumeric display, or the multi-line LCD of the Flexible User Interface.

Note: Software-related PIDs, such as vertical market software packages and programmer options, are not listed in this manual.

Basic Control Panels (United States)

Control panels available in the U.S. that use the SPS:

• 4100-9111 2x40 Master Controller – Domestic (742-830)4100-9114 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – Domestic (743-201)(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.

• 4100-9121 2x40 Redundant Master Controller – Domestic (742-729)(120 VAC 60 HZ), Displays (2), CPU Cards (2), System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power. Occupies two bays.

• 4100-9122 Flexible User Interface Redundant Master Controller – Domestic (743-239)(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Cards (2), System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power. Occupies two bays.

• 4100-9131 Master Controller – Domestic (742-844)(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.

Control panels available in the U.S. that use the EPS:

• 4100-9311 Master Controller – Domestic (743-1026)(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel (RUI+), Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

Continued on the next page

1-10

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Basic Control Panels (United States)

• 4100-9314 Master Controller – Domestic (743-1027)(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm (English) Display with raised keys, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

• 4100-9331 Master Controller– Domestic (743-1028)(120VAC 50/60HZ) No Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

Basic Control Panels(Canada)

Control panels available in Canada that use the SPS:

• 4100-9112 2x40 Master Controller – Canadian English (742-831)/ 4100-9115 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – Canadian English (743-202)(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.

• 4100-9113 2x40 Redundant Master Controller – Canadian French (742-832)/4100-9116 Flexible User Interface Redundant Master Controller – Canadian French (743-203)(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.

• 4100-9132 Master Controller – Canadian English (742-845)(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.

• 4100-9133 Master Controller – Canadian French (742-846)(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.

Continued on the next page

1-11

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Basic Control Panels (Canada)

Control panels available in Canada that use the EPS:

• 4100-9312 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1029)(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

• 4100-9313 Master Controller – Canadian French (743-1030)(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

• 4100-9315 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1031) (120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

• 4100-9316 Master Controller – Canadian French (743-1032)(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

• 4100-9332 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1033)(120VAC 50/60HZ) No Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

1-12

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Basic Control Panels (International)

International control panels that use the SPS:

• 4100-9211 2x40 Master Controller – International (742-848)/ 4100-9212 Master Controller – 220/240 V (743-204) 4100-9214 Master Controller – China 220/240V (743-765) (220/230/240 VAC 50/60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.

• 4100-9213 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – 220/240 V (743-333)(120 VAC 60 HZ) Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 V Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power

• 4100-9230 Master Controller – International (742-849)(220/230/240 VAC 50/60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.

International control panels that use the EPS:

• 4100-9511 Master Controller – International (743-1034)(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

• 4100-9512 Master Controller – International (743-1035)(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display (with Slide-in Labels for Language Customization), CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

• 4100-9513 Master Controller – International (743-1036)(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display (with Slide-in Labels for Language Customization), CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

• 4100-9531 Master Controller 250PTS (1 Loop) – International (743-1037)(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module.

1-13

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Basic Control Panels (International)

• 4100-9532 Master Controller 500PTS (2 Loops) - International 743-1038)(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, IDNet (4 X 5) Module.

• 4100-9533 Master Controller 750PTS (3 Loops)- International (743-1039)(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, 2 IDNet (4 X 5) Modules.

• 4100-9534 Master Controller 500PTS (5 Loops)- International (743-1040) (220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 x 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, IDNet Module 250 points (4100-3107).

Transponders This section lists the two transponder cabinets, both of which include an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC):

• 4100-9600 Basic Transponder (742-866). Includes a basic TIC.

• 4100-9601 Local Mode Transponder (742-867). Includes a local mode TIC.

Remote Annunciator

• 4100-9610 Remote Annunciator (742-868). Includes an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC).

• 4100-9611 Remote Annunciator (743-081). Includes an expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC).

1-14

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Remote Display Assemblies

• 4100-9401 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly - Domestic (743-187). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).

• 4100-9402 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly - Domestic (743-188). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).

• 4100-9421 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – Canadian French (743-189). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).

• 4100-9422 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – Canadian French (743-190). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).

• 4100-9441 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – International (743-191). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).

• 4100-9442 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – International (743-192). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).

Basic Audio Selections

This section lists the two audio cabinets, both of which include an audio expansion bay with a power distribution interface (PDI), audio controller board, and a microphone module.

• 4100-9620 Basic Audio with Microphone – Analog (742-869)

• 4100-9601 Basic Audio with Microphone – Digital (742-870)Note: Refer to Appendix K for information about 520 Hz compatible audio components.

Utility Cabinets This section lists the two utility cabinets, which contain mounting rails for bays and mounting plates for 2120 modules.

• 4100-9642 Two-Bay Utility Cabinet Kit (for 2120 Equipment) (742-871). Includes two-bay mounting rails and two 4100 (non-4100ES/4100U) expansion bays.

• 4100-9643 Three-Bay Utility Cabinet Kit (for 2120 Equipment) (742-872). Includes three-bay mounting rails and three 4100 (non-4100ES/4100U) expansion bays.

Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to provide monitoring of security parts.

Master Controller Upgrade Kits

Upgrade kits are used for retrofitting newer modules into old-style systems.

• 4100-7150 Master Controller Upgrade with 2x40 Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (742-592)

• 4100-7151 Master Controller Upgrade with No Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (742-394)

• 4100-7152 Master Controller Upgrade with 2X40 Display, operator interface and power supply (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (742-922)

• 4100-7153 Flexible User Interface Display Upgrade (4100ES with 2x40 display to Flexible User Interface display) (743-240)

• 4100-7154 Master Controller Upgrade with Flexible User Interface Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (743-241)

• 4100-7158 NXP Master Controller Upgrade w/o Display (Legacy 4100 to Rev 13 or higher) (743-777

• 4100-9833 Master Controller Upgrade with 2x40 Display in One-Bay Beige Enclosure (4020) (742-804)

Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to provide monitoring of security parts.

1-15

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Rack Mount Kits • 4100-2140 Bay Mounting Kit (742-741)

• 4100-2144 PDM Mounting Kit (742-547)

Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to provide monitoring of security parts.

Power Distribution Modules

• 4100-0634 Power Distribution Module 120 V (742-396)• 4100-0635 Power Distribution Module 220/230/240 V (742-513)

Expansion Bays • 4100-2300 Non-Audio Expansion Bay (742-839)• 4100-2301 Expansion Bay Upgrade Kit (742-602)• 4100-2320 Audio Expansion Bay (742-873)

Expansion Battery Chargers for Basic FACPs

The expansion battery chargers listed here are used with the standard control panels listed above.

• 4081-9306 External 120 V Battery Cabinet with Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; Red (637-029)

• 4081-9308 External 220-240 V Battery Cabinet with Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; Red (637-030)

Communication Modules

The following communication modules can be added on to 4100ES systems.• 4100-3102 MAPNET II Interface Module (742-696)• 4100-3103 MAPNET Isolator Module (742-725)• 4100-3109 IDNet 2 Card, 2 Loops (743-1442)• 4100-3110 IDNet 2+2 Card, 4 Loops (743-1441)• 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC) (742-701)• 4100-6030 Service Modem Module (742-584)• 4100-6031 City Card with Disconnect (742-403)• 4100-6032 City Card without Disconnect (742-404)• 4100-6033 Alarm Relay Card (742-402)• 4100-6034 Tamper Switch with IDNet IAM (742-648)• 4100-6036 Physical Bridge (Style 4) (742-702)• 4100-6037 Physical Bridge (Style 7) (742-703)• 4100-6038 Dual RS-232 Interface Card (742-704)• 4100-6039 Modem Bridge (2120) (742-705)• 4100-6041 DC Powered FSK Modem (2120) (742-707)• 4100-6042 Communication Line Repeater (2120) (742-708)• 4100-6043 RS-232/ DC Comm Converter (2120) (742-709)• 4100-6044 DC Comm/ RS-232 Converter (2120) (742-710)• 4100-6045 Decoder Module (742-711)• 4100-6047 Building Interface Card (743-872)• 4100-6048 VESDA Interface Kit (742-714)• 4100-6052 DACT (742-700)• 4100-6054 Fiber-Optic Line Driver (2120) (742-715)• 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (742-841)• 4100-6056 Wired Media Card (742-619)• 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card (742-620)• 4100-6058 Style 7 Interface Module (DC Comm – 2120) (742-604)• 4100-6059 Decoder Module (2120) (742-596)• 4100-6062 TFX Interface (743-278)

Continued on the next page

1-16

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Communication Modules

• 4100-6065 BMUX Communication Module (743-645)• 4100-6069 BACpac Ethernet (743-747)• 4100-6080 DACT Side Mounted (743-1041)

Power Supplies The power supplies listed below can be used with 4100ES systems.• 4100-5101 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (742-383)

• 4100-5102 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (50/60 Hz) (742-384)

• 4100-5103 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (Canada) (742-385)

• 4100-5111 System Power Supply (SPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (742-631)

• 4100-5112 System Power Supply (SPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (50/60 Hz) (742-632)

• 4100-5113 System Power Supply (SPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (Canada) (742-633)

• 4100-5115 Expansion NAC Module (XNAC) (742-386)

• 4100-5120 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (120 VAC) (742-659)

• 4100-5121 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (120 VAC) (Canada) (742-660)

• 4100-5122 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (742-661)

• 4100-5124 TrueAlert Class A Adapter Module (742-662)

• 4100-5125 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (120 VAC) (742-628)

• 4100-5126 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (120 VAC) (Canada) (742-629)

• 4100-5127 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (742-300)

• 4100-5152 12 V, 2 A Power Option (742-718)

• 4100-5153 13 A Utility Power Supply (24 VDC/120 VAC) (2120) (742-719)

• 4100-5154 13 A Utility Power Supply (24 VDC/240 VAC) (2120) (742-720)

• 4100-5155 8 A Expansion Power Supply with 4 A Charger 120/240 VAC (2120) (742-517)

• 4100-0156 8 VDC Converter (742-816)

• 4100-5311 120 V 50/60 Hz EPS with IDNet 2 Card

• 4100-5313 220/230/240 V 50/60 Hz EPS with IDNet 2 Card

• 4100-5325 120 V 50/60 Hz EPS

• 4100-5327 220/230/240 V 50/60Hz EPS

Signaling Modules

The signaling modules listed below can be used with 4100ES systems.

• 4100-5005 8-Zone Module (Class B) (742-655)

• 4100-5015 8-Zone Module (Class A) (742-721)

• 4100-3201 4-Relay Module (2 A) (742-722)

• 4100-3202 4-Relay Module (10 A) (742-723)

• 4100-3203 8-Relay Module (3 A) (742-724)

• 4100-3204 4-Point Relay Module (2 A) (742-948)

• 4100-3206 8-Point Relay Module (3 A) (742-949)

1-17

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Annunciator Modules

The following annunciator modules are available for the 4100ES.• 4100-1279 2-inch (51-mm) Blank Display Module (742-519)• 4100-1280 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-509)• 4100-1281 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Yellow LEDs) (742-508)• 4100-1282 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (1 red / 1 yellow LED per switch) (742-408)• 4100-1283 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (2 yellow LEDs per switch) (742-409)• 4100-1284 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (1 red / 1 green LED per switch) (742-407)• 4100-1285 16-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-507)• 4100-1286 Hands Off Auto (HOA) Switch Display Card (742-514)• 4100-1287 24-Switch/24-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-506)• 4100-1288 LED/Switch Controller Card (742-410)• 4100-1289 Expansion LED/Switch Controller Card (No mounting plate) (742-626)• 4100-1290 24-Point Graphic I/O Module (742-726)• 4100-1291 Remote Unit Interface Card (742-727)• 4100-1292 Remote Command Center (742-737)• 4100-1293 Panel-Mounted Printer (742-739)• 4100-1294 LED/Switch Slide-In Label Kit (for up to 3 Bays) (742-863)• 4100-1295 HOA Module (No Text) with 24 Switches and 24 Red LEDs (742-874)

Transponders and Transponder Components

The following is a list of transponder cabinets and components for the 4100ES.

• 4100-9600 Basic Transponder (Expansion Bay with PDI and Basic TIC) (742-866)

• 4100-9601 Local Mode Transponder (Expansion Bay with PDI and Local Mode TIC) (742-867)

• 4100-0620 Basic Transponder Interface Card (TIC) (742-520)

• 4100-0621 Analog Audio Riser Module (742-534)

• 4100-0622 Digital Audio Riser Module (742-535)

• 4100-0625 Local Mode TIC (742-521)

• 4100-0632 Terminal Block Utility Module (742-695)

• 4100-0633 Transponder Cabinet Tamper Switch (742-738)

• 4100-1341 MCC Digital Audio Riser Module (743-850)

Audio Operator Interfaces

The following modules are used only with the 4100U and 4100ES systems.

• 4100-1252 Audio Operator Interface – 1 Channel (742-798)

• 4100-1253 Audio Operator Interface – 1.5 Channel (742-801)

• 4100-1254 Audio Operator Interface – 2 Channel (742-799)

• 4100-1255 Audio Operator Interface – 3-8 Channel (742-800)

Audio Controller Boards

The following audio controller boards are used with the audio operator interface.

• 4100-1210 Audio Controller Board – Analog, 1.5 Channels (742-517)

• 4100-1211 Audio Controller Board – Digital (742-387)

• 4100-1311 Audio Controller Board – Digital (743-446)

1-18

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Telephones/Microphones

The following phone and microphone assemblies are used with audio operator interfaces.

• 4100-1270 Master Telephone with Phone Card and 3 NACs (742-865)

• 4100-1271 Remote Master Telephone (742-597)

• 4100-1243 Microphone (742-523)

• 4100-1244 Remote Microphone (742-821)

• 4100-1265 Degraded Fail-Safe Mode Microphone Pre-Amp (Master – 743-238)

• 4100-1269 Degraded Fail-Safe Mode Microphone Pre-Amp (Slave – 743-306)

Additional Audio Modules

Optional modules for the 4100ES audio system are listed below.

• 4100-0623 Network Audio Interface Module (742-522)

• 4100-1240 Aux Audio Input Board (742-388)

• 4100-1241 Audio Message Memory Expansion Module, 8 Minute (742-518)

• 4100-1242 Audio Message Memory Expansion Module, 32 Minute (742-393)

• 4100-1272 Telephone Expansion Card (742-600)

• 4100-1273 Class A Telephone Adapter Module (742-599)

• 4100-1274 Microphone Mux Module (743-808)

Common Audio Options

• 4100-1245 Flex 50 Expansion NAC Board with 3 Class B NACs (742-540)

• 4100-1246 Flex 50 Class A Adapter (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Class A) (742-539)

• 4100-1248 100 Watt Expansion NAC Board with 6 Class B NACs (742-524)

• 4100-1249 100 Watt Class A Adapter (Converts 6 on-board NACs to Class A) (742-543)

• 4100-1259 Constant Supervision NAC 25 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision) (743-163)

• 4100-1260 Constant Supervision NAC 70 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision) (743-164)

• 4100-1266 Expansion Signal Card Expansion NAC Board with 3 Class B NACs (743-302)

• 4100-1267 Expansion Signal Card Class A Adapter (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Class A (743-303)

• 4100-1268 Expansion Signal Card Constant Supervision NAC Adapter, 25 or 70 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision) (743-304)

• 4100-5116 Expansion Signal Card with 3 Class B NACs (743-159)

Amplifiers Note: The following amplifiers are used only in the 4100U and 4100ES systems, and are not compatible with the Constant Supervision NAC (CSNAC) option.

100 W Analog Amplifiers:• 4100-1214 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-550)

• 4100-1215 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-551)

• 4100-1216 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-552)

• 4100-1217 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-553)

• 4100-1218 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-554)

• 4100-1219 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-555)

• 4100-1220 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-550)

• 4100-1221 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-551)

Continued on the next page

1-19

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Amplifiers • 4100-1222 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-552)

• 4100-1223 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-553)

• 4100-1224 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-554)

• 4100-1225 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-555)

100 W Digital Amplifiers (except for 4100-1230 and -1236 [95 W]):• 4100-1228 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-544)

• 4100-1229 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-545)

• 4100-1230 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-546)

• 4100-1231 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-547)

• 4100-1232 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-548)

• 4100-1233 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-549)

• 4100-1234 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-544)

• 4100-1235 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-545)

• 4100-1236 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-546)

• 4100-1237 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-547)

• 4100-1238 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-548)

• 4100-1239 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-549)

Analog Flex Amplifiers:

• 4100-1212 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (742-794)

• 4100-1213 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-795)

• 4100-1261 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-001)

• 4100-1262 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-002)

Digital Flex Amplifiers:

• 4100-1226 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (742-796)

• 4100-1227 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-797)

• 4100-1263 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-003)

• 4100-1264 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-004)

Note: The following amplifiers are only used in the 4100U and 4100ES systems, and are compatible with the Constant Supervision NAC (CSNAC) option and 4100U Master Firmware Revision 11.08 or later.

100 W Analog Amplifiers:

• 4100-1314 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-438)

• 4100-1315 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-439)

• 4100-1316 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-440)

• 4100-1317 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-441)

• 4100-1318 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-442)

• 4100-1319 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-443)

• 4100-1320 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-438)

• 4100-1321 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-439)

• 4100-1322 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-440)

• 4100-1323 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-441)

• 4100-1324 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-442)

• 4100-1325 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-443)

Continued on the next page

1-20

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Amplifiers 100 W Digital Amplifiers:

• 4100-1328 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-449)

• 4100-1329 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-450)

• 4100-1330 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-451)

• 4100-1331 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-452)

• 4100-1332 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-453)

• 4100-1333 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-454)

• 4100-1334 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-449)

• 4100-1335 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-450)

• 4100-1336 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-451)

• 4100-1337 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-452)

• 4100-1338 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-453)

• 4100-1339 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-454)

Analog Flex Amplifiers:

• 4100-1312 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-436)

• 4100-1313 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-437)

• 4100-1361 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-444)

• 4100-1362 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-445)

Digital Flex Amplifiers:

• 4100-1326 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-447)

• 4100-1327 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-448)

• 4100-1363 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-455)

• 4100-1364 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-456)

Miscellaneous Modules

The following modules are for 4100ES systems:

• 4100-0650 Battery Shelf (for 50 Ah batteries) (742-840)

• 4100-0640 Memory Add-On Module for Flexible User Interface (743-279)

• 4100-5128 Battery Distribution Terminal Module (742-843)

• 4100-9854 4100U/4100ES Module Legacy Bay Mounting Kit (743-856)

1-21

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100 PIDs (non-4100ES/4100U)

Overview This section lists the 4100, non-4100ES/4100U, PIDs that are supported by the 4100ES Fire Alarm System (in retrofit applications). There are two basic types of PIDs listed here:

• PIDs denoting standard installations, such as host panels containing multiple, already functioning modules

• PIDs denoting individual modules or back boxes:

- offered as after-market product for standard installations- offered as options or aftermarket product for configured installations

Note: Software-related PIDs, such as vertical market software packages and programmer options, are not listed in this book.

System Types and Options

There are six standard types of 4100 control panels used with the 4100. A PID identifies each system type. These PIDs are combined with the more specific PIDs listed after this topic to meet the requirements of custom installations:

• 4100-8001 Fire Alarm Control Panel

• 4100-8002 Remote Annunciator Panel

• 4100-8010 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel

• 4100-8019 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel with Transponder

• 4100-8201 Fire Alarm Control Panel with Audio

• 4100-8210 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel with Audio

• 4100-8901/8909 Add-On to Existing System or Annunciator

• 4100-6050/6051 Power Limited Panel/Non-Power Limited Panel

Master Controller Option Module

4100-6001 240 VAC Controller Power Input

1-22

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)

NAC Modules Notification appliance circuit (NAC) modules are listed below.

• 4100-4001 2-Circuit (Style Y)

• 4100-4011 2-Circuit (Style Z)

• 4100-4321 6-Circuit (Style Y)

• 4100-4331 6-Circuit (Style Z)

IDC Modules Initiating device circuit (IDC) modules are listed below.See 579-832 for 2-Wire Detector Compatibility Chart.

• 4100-5004 8-Zone (Style B)

• 4100-5014 8-Zone (Style D)

Optional Modules Miscellaneous optional modules are listed below.

• 4100-0104 Additional Battery Charger (120 V)

• 4100-0105 5 A Power Supply (120 V; Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-0108 Expansion 8 A Power Supply (Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-0110 MAPNET II Addressable Module

• 4100-0111 MAPNET II Isolator Module

• 4100-0113 Dual RS-232 Module

• 4100-0114 Additional Battery Charger (240 V)

• 4100-0115 5 A Power Supply (240 V; Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-0117 MINIPLEX 8 A Remote Power Supply (Power Limited)

• 4100-0118 8 A Power Supply (240 V; Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-0119 2 A Converter (12 VDC; Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-0123 2120 Communications Module (Style 7)

• 4100-0124 Enhanced Charger Package

• 4100-0129 25.5 V Limiter Module

• 4100-0136 Decoder Module

• 4100-0137 RS-232 Module for 2120 Communications (Style 7)

• 4100-0139 Service Modem

• 4100-0153 Contact Closure DACT

• 4100-0154 VESDA Interface (Aftermarket Only)

• 4100-0155 Serial DACT

• 4100-0304 Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Module (Style 7)

• 4100-0451 Panel-Mounted Printer

• 4100-0540 4-20 mA ZAM Modules (2 per plate)

• 4100-1108 8 A Power Supply (120 VAC; Power Limited)

Auxiliary Relay Controls

The following modules are auxiliary relay controls.

• 4100-3001 4-Relay, 2 A (with feedback)

• 4100-3002 4-Relay, 10 A (with feedback)

• 4100-3003 8-Relay, 3 A (with feedback)

1-23

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)

Audio Controllers and Amplifiers

The following modules can be used in 4100ES Upgrade/Retrofit applications, but cannot be used with 4100ES audio modules.

• 4100-0210 Single-Channel Audio Controller Board

• 4100-0211 Dual-Channel Audio Controller Board

• 4100-0212 Triple-Channel Audio Controller Board

• 4100-0201 25 VRMS/25 W Audio Amplifier (no Power Supply; Power Limited)

• 4100-0202 25 VRMS/Dual 25 W Audio Amplifier (with Power Supply; Power Limited)

• 4100-1203 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Power Limited)

• 4100-0203 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-0213 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (240 VAC; Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-0207 70 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-0217 70 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (240 VAC; Non-Power Limited)

• 4100-1207 70 VRMS/90 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Power Limited)

Audio Options The following options can be used in 4100ES Retrofit/Upgrade systems with 4100 Back Boxes.

• 4100-0204 Microphone and Enclosure

• 4100-0205 Master Telephone

• 4100-0206 Redundant Tone Generator

• 4100-0215 Phone Riser Terminal Block

Annunciation Modules

• 4100-0301 64/64 LED/Switch Controller

• 4100-0302 24-Point I/O Graphic Interface

• 4100-0401 8-LED Display Card (Red Led)

• 4100-0402 16-Point Display Card (Red/Yellow LEDs)

• 4100-0403 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Momentary switches; red LEDs)

• 4100-0404 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Maintained switches; one red and one green LED per switch)

• 4100-0405 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Maintained switches; one red and one yellow LED per switch)

• 4100-0408 8-Switch/8-LED Annunciator Control Switch Module

• 4100-0450 Remote Panel LCD

1-24

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)

Miscellaneous Modules

• 4100-0133 Tamper Switch

• 4100-1010 External Battery Power and Charger

Network Modules The following modules are intended to be used in a networked 4100 system.

• 4120-6014 Modular Interface Board

• 4120-6023 Physical Bridge (Style 4)

• 4120-6024 Physical Bridge (Style 7)

• 4120-0142 Wired Media Card

• 4120-0143 Fiber-Optic Media Card

• 4120-0144 Modem Media Card

• 4120-0156 8 VDC Module (provides 3 A from 28 V tap)

System Accessories

• 2080-9047 DACT Communication Cable (14 feet [4 meters]) (733-913)

• 2081-9031 Potted Module for PVCS (740-688)

• 2081-9272 Batteries (6.2 Ah) (112-112)*

• 2081-9274 Batteries (10 Ah) (112-113)*

• 2081-9275 Batteries (18.8 Ah) (112-046)*

• 2081-9276 Batteries (33 Ah) (112-053)*

• 2081-9279 Batteries (110 Ah) (112-123)*

• 2081-9287 Batteries (25 Ah) (112-134)*

• 2081-9288 Batteries (12.7 Ah) (112-133)*

• 2081-9296 Batteries (50 Ah) (112-136)*

• 4190-9803 Replacement Paper for 4100-0451 Panel-Mounted Printer (473-019)

*Or the equivalent.

2-1

Chapter 2

Installing FACP Components

Introduction This chapter describes installation procedures that apply directly to the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) as well as each step of the host panel installation for both the FACP SPS and the EPS CPU configurations. Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages to get a sense of the types of bays and modules that make up the FACP.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

IMPORTANT: Verify FACP System Programmer, Executive, and Slave Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components. Refer to the Technical Support Information and Downloads website for compatibility information.

Topic Page

Introduction to the FACP 2-2

SPS CPU Bay Overview 2-3

EPS CPU Bay Overview 2-7

FACP Operator Interface 2-12

FACP Expansion Bays 2-13

FACP Power Requirements 2-14

Mounting Back Boxes 2-15

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics 2-18

Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional) 2-21

Step 4. Mounting the Door 2-22

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay 2-25

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays 2-26

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays 2-31

Step 8. Configuring Cards 2-39

Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries 2-41

Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures 2-43

The Terminal Block Utility Module 2-44

2-2

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Introduction to the FACP

Overview 4100 FACPs are back boxes that contain the CPU, operator interface, FACP power supply, the power distribution module, the power distribution interface, backup batteries, and any additional modules that the panel requires.The FACP is the central hub (often referred to as a host panel) of a standalone or MINIPLEX fire alarm system. In a networked system, the FACP can be connected to other system FACPs, so that each host panel is a node on the network.

CPU Bay Every FACP contains a CPU bay. The CPU bay is equipped with:

• 1 FACP power supply module.

• 1 RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard:

- In a standalone or MINIPLEX system the CPU motherboard is supplied with a master controller daughter card attached to it.

- In a networked system a network interface card (NIC) is attached as a second daughter card to the master motherboard

• 1 Power Distribution Interface (PDI) (EPS configuration only):

- There are eight 2-inch slots on the PDI. Slots 1 and 2 are used for aftermarket boards. Slots 3 to 8 are taken up by the FACP Power Supply and the CPU Master Motherboard.

Figure 2-1. The CPU Bay

Table 2-1. CPU Components

Configuration PDI Card Master Motherboard CardFACP Power

Supply

SPS CPU - RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard 566-938

SPS

EPS CPU 8 slots EPS

n o i t u b i r t s i D r e w o P )

I D P ( e c a f r e t n I

r e t s a M d r a o b r e h t o M

y l p p u S r e w o P P C A F

d r a o b r e h t o M

l a n o i t p O s d r a o b r e h t o M “ 2

s i s s a h C

y l p p u S r e w o P

s d r a C d r a o b r e h t o M ” 2 l a n o i t p O h t i w w e i V - t n o r F y a B U P C w e i V - e d i S y a B U P C d e l b m e s s a s i D

IDP

R+ SR

VD

R- ND

0V

- 1

RS

23

2

XM

IT

GN

D

RT

S

CT

S

RC

V

1 D E L 2 D E L

3 D E L

RU

A

I-

RU

A

I+

RU

B

I-

RU

B

I+

Sh

ield

1 troP6 P

3 2 1

-LDVRSR 2-V0DNG+LDVRSRC42OZEIP

DNGSTCVCRSTRTIMX

4 D E L

3 2 1

8 t o l S 7 t o l S 6 t o l S 5 t o l S 4 t o l S 3 t o l S 2 t o l S 1 t o l S

CPU Master Daughter Card

(EPS Configuration only)

CPU Master

(EPS with IDNet 2card depicted)

CPU

2-3

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

SPS CPU Bay Overview

RUI+ Master Motherboard

The 4100 Master motherboard has two slots, one is dedicated for the system CPU and The other slot is typically used for 4120 Network or RS232 cards. The first RUI channel in the system is the master motherboard. The RUI+ feature on this card provides electrically-isolated power for the RUI channel, giving it greater immunity to crosstalk from other channels.The card is installed on the PDI, occupying the space next to the power supply.

Figure 2-2. RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Note: If the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-7001 (RCU) move the P5 and P6 jumpers to the RUI NON ISO position.

RS-232/Network SwitchCard Port 2 Network Wired

Media/RS-232 Terminal Block

Power/COMMS to Adjacent Bay

CPU Slot

10POS female

RUI Earth Fault LEDs

RUI Trouble LEDs

RUI Terminal Block

Network Wired Media/RS-232Terminal Block

COMM

10POS female

PDI Connector(on back)

Power

Network/RS232 Slot

RS-232/NetworkSwitch Card Port 1

Earth Fault connection to power supply (EPS only)

RUI IsolationJumpers - See Note

J7J5

P6

P5

RU

I N

ON

ISO

RU

I+

ISO

2-4

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

The master controller daughter card mounts onto the master motherboard. The master controller daughter card contains a service port, a direct drive user interface connection, and a port for a service modem.

Figure 2-3. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

MODEM2

1D

EL2

DEL

3D

ELY

AL

PSI

DT

RO

P E

CIV

RE

S

FF

O TA

BN

O TA

B

SERVICE MODEM CONNECTOR (P4)

BATTERY BACKUP ON/ OFF JUMPER (P3)

SERVICE PORT (P5)

DIRECT-DRIVE DISPLAY PORT (P6)

CONNECTOR TO CPU MOTHERBOARD (P9)

SERVICE PORT COMM JUMPER (P1)

CPU BOOTLOADER LEDs (LED A – LED D)

RESET LED (LED1)

ON: CPU is in reset. If LED is flashing,board is unable to come out of reset. Possibly corrupt CFIG or board needs to be replaced.

OFF: CPU is running normally.

RESET (WARM START)SWITCH (SW1)

Battery

ETHERNET CONNECTOR(J1) RJ45 TYPE

SWAP CFIG JUMPER (P15) INSERT JUMPER DURING BOOT FOR CFIG SWAP

COLD START SWITCH (SW2)HOLD DURING BOOT FOR COLD START

COMPACT FLASHUsed for alternative job/exec storage (card does not “run” out of compact flash)

2-5

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs

The master controller daughter card LEDs indicate the card status as shown in Table 2-2.These LEDs show diagnostic status for internal RandD use.

Master Controller Switches

Table 2-2. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs

Status Condition LED D LED C LED B LED A

Bootloader Initialization On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s),

Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s)

Bad Master CRC or No Master Present

On Off Off Off

Diagnostic Fail - RAM On Off Off On

Diagnostic Fail -Bootloader CRC

On Off On Off

Downloading Master On Off On On

Downloading CFIG On On Off Off

Downloading MsgLib On On Off On

Downloading Bootloader On On On Off

Download Successful On On On On

Table 2-3. Master Controller Switches

Switch Description

Reset (Warm Start)(0566-719 only)

Short press (< 3 seconds) to activate a software controlled reset (warm start).Press and hold (> 3 seconds) to force a hardware reset (also a warm start).Generally unless the CPU card appears to be locked up you should always use the software controlled reset.

A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.

Reset (Warm Start)(other than 0566-719

Cards)

Press (any duration) to cause a warm start. A warm start pre-serves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.

CFIG Swap(0566-719 only)

During startup, insert a jumper to revert to the alternate (previous) CFIG. Remove the jumper after the system reboots and CFIG swap are complete. If you are using an older revision of the CPU card, press and hold this button. This is used if the current CFIG is corrupt or for troubleshooting the system.

Note: You will get a "Using previous CFIG" trouble in the system. This trouble will not clear until a new CFIG is downloaded or you swap back to the original CFIG.

Cold Start(0566-719 only)

During startup, press and hold this button to clear all history logs and enable any points that were previously disabled.

2-6

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

System Power Supply (SPS)

The SPS is the power source for the CPU. The SPS provides 24 VDC card power to the CPU motherboard, which is distributed to other bays up to 2A capacity.

The SPS provides voltage and current information to the CPU card, which can then be displayed at the user interface. The SPS provides an IDNet channel that supports initiating devices and some notification appliances, such as the 4009-9201/9301 Audio NAC Extender. The SPS also has three on-board NACs that support reverse polarity or SmartSync supervision.

Auxiliary power, relay, and city circuit/relay module functions are also supported.

The SPS performs standard fire alarm functions, such as brownout detect, battery transfer, battery recharge, earth fault detection, and power limiting per UL 864.

Figure 2-4 is an illustration of the SPS.

Figure 2-4. System Power Supply (566-071)

CITY / RELAY CARD MOUNTING AREA

CITY CARD CONNECTOR (P7)

AUXILIARY RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK

(TB4)

AUXILIARY POWER TERMINAL BLOCK

(TB3)

ACCONNECTOR (bulkhead connector on steel plate)

BATTERY CONNECTORS: P4P5

LEGACY POWER/COMM TO CPUMOTHERBOARD (P8)

DEVICE ADDRESS SWITCH (SW1)

IDNET SHIELD SWITCH (P2)

CITY/RELAY CARD TROUBLE INDICATION

SWITCH (P3)

EARTHFAULTMONITOR SWITCH (P1)

NAC TERMINAL BLOCK (TB2) IDNET TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1)

POWER/COMM TO CPU MOTHERBOARD (P6)

2-7

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

EPS CPU Bay Overview

The Power Distribution Interface

In the CPU bay and the expansion bays, power and data are distributed via the PDI. The PDI is a wiring board with eight card slots, each of which can accommodate a 4 x 5 slave card. If legacy motherboards are used, they must be mounted above the PDI using metal standoffs.Note: Power source jumpers P4 and P5 must be placed in position 2-3 (to the right) for proper operation of

an EPS CPU bay.

Figure 2-5. The Power Distribution Interface (PDI)

RUI+ Master Motherboard

The 4100 Master motherboard has two slots, one is dedicated for the system CPU and The other slot is typically used for 4120 Network or RS232 cards. The first RUI channel in the system is the master motherboard. The RUI+ feature on this card provides electrically-isolated power for the RUI channel, giving it greater immunity to crosstalk from other channels.The card is installed on the PDI, occupying the space next to the power supply.

Figure 2-6. RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Note: If the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-7001 (RCU) move the P5 and P6 jumpers to the RUI NON ISO position.

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACEASSY 566-084

POWER/COMMS CONNECTORS

(P1-P3)

AUDIO INTERFACE CONNECTORS (P6, P7)

POWER SOURCE JUMPERS

(P4, P5)

RS-232/Network SwitchCard Port 2 Network Wired

Media/RS-232 Terminal Block

Power/COMMS to Adjacent Bay

CPU Slot

10POS female

RUI Earth Fault LEDs

RUI Trouble LEDs

RUI Terminal Block

Network Wired Media/RS-232Terminal Block

COMM

10POS female

PDI Connector(on back)

Power

Network/RS232 Slot

RS-232/NetworkSwitch Card Port 1

Earth Fault connection to power supply (EPS only)

RUI IsolationJumpers - See Note

J7J5

P6

P5

RU

I N

ON

ISO

RU

I+

ISO

2-8

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

The master controller daughter card mounts onto the master motherboard. The master controller daughter card contains a service port, a direct drive user interface connection, and a port for a service modem.

Figure 2-7. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

MODEM2

1D

EL2

DEL

3D

ELY

AL

PSI

DT

RO

P E

CIV

RE

S

FF

O TA

BN

O TA

B

SERVICE MODEM CONNECTOR (P4)

BATTERY BACKUP ON/ OFF JUMPER (P3)

SERVICE PORT (P5)

DIRECT-DRIVE DISPLAY PORT (P6)

CONNECTOR TO CPU MOTHERBOARD (P9)

SERVICE PORT COMM JUMPER (P1)

CPU BOOTLOADER LEDs (LED A – LED D)

RESET LED (LED1)

ON: CPU is in reset. If LED is flashing,board is unable to come out of reset. Possibly corrupt CFIG or board needs to be replaced.

OFF: CPU is running normally.

RESET (WARM START)SWITCH (SW1)

Battery

ETHERNET CONNECTOR(J1) RJ45 TYPE

SWAP CFIG JUMPER (P15) INSERT JUMPER DURING BOOT FOR CFIG SWAP

COLD START SWITCH (SW2)HOLD DURING BOOT FOR COLD START

COMPACT FLASHUsed for alternative job/exec storage (card does not “run” out of compact flash)

2-9

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs

The master controller daughter card LEDs indicate the card status as shown in Table 2-4.These LEDs show diagnostic status for internal RandD use.

Master Controller Daughter Card Switches

Table 2-4. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs

Status Condition LED D LED C LED B LED A

Bootloader Initialization On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s),

Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s)

Bad Master CRC or No Master Present

On Off Off Off

Diagnostic Fail - RAM On Off Off On

Diagnostic Fail -Bootloader CRC

On Off On Off

Downloading Master On Off On On

Downloading CFIG On On Off Off

Downloading MsgLib On On Off On

Downloading Bootloader On On On Off

Download Successful On On On On

Table 2-5. Master Controller Switches

Switch Description

Reset (Warm Start)(0566-719 only)

Short press (< 3 seconds) to activate a software controlled reset (warm start).Press and hold (> 3 seconds) to force a hardware reset (also a warm start).Generally unless the CPU card appears to be locked up you should always use the software controlled reset.

A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.

Reset (Warm Start)(other than 0566-719

Cards)

Press (any duration) to cause a warm start. A warm start pre-serves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are in the disabled state.

CFIG Swap(0566-719 only)

During startup, insert a jumper to revert to the alternate (previous) CFIG. Remove the jumper after the system reboots and CFIG swap are complete. If you are using an older revision of the CPU card, press and hold this button. This is used if the current CFIG is corrupt or for troubleshooting the system.

Note: You will get a "Using previous CFIG" trouble in the system. This trouble will not clear until a new CFIG is downloaded or you swap back to the original CFIG.

Cold Start(0566-719 only)

During startup, press and hold this button to clear all history logs and enable any points that were previously disabled.

2-10

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Extended Power Supply with IDNet 2

The EPS with IDNet 2 is the power source for the CPU and the host cabinet. The EPS provides 24 VDC card power to the CPU motherboard.

The EPS provides voltage and current information to the CPU card, which can then be displayed at the user interface. The IDNet 2 card on the EPS provides one IDNet channel that supports initiating devices and some notification appliances, such as the 4009-9201/9301 Audio NAC Extender.

Auxiliary power, relay, and city circuit/relay module functions are also supported.

The EPS performs standard fire alarm functions, such as brownout detect, battery transfer, battery recharge, earth fault detection, and power limiting in accordance with UL 864.

Figure 2-8 is an illustration of the EPS. See Figure 2-9 for the IDNet 2 card.

Figure 2-8. EPS with IDNet 2 (566-872)

Continued on the next page

IDNACTerminals

Auxiliary/NAC

RUI+ EarthDetect

Connection to Batterries

Connectionto Bridge

Battery DisconectJumper

AddressSwitch

Trouble ScrollButton

Earth Detect Jumper

4 Pin HarnessCard Power / Comms

Connectionto PDI

LEDs

City Card Connection

21

37

65

48

ABCDECH1CH2CH3COM

IDNet 2 Card

IDNET 2

12

34

56

78

B+B-A+A-B+B-A+A-LOOP 1LOOP 2

2-11

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Extended Power Supply with IDNet 2

The 4100-3109 IDNet 2 is a slave card that provides the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with an isolated IDNet channel which contains two isolated loops.

This card is compatible with IDNet communicating initiating devices and allows the system CPU to communicate with up to 250 peripheral devices, such as smoke detectors and pull stations.

Figure 2-9. IDNet 2 Card

IDNET 2

12

34

56

78

B+B-A+A-B+B-A+A-LOOP 1LOOP 2

Loop 1Class A/BJumper (P1)

Loop 2Class A/BJumper (P2)

PDI Connector (P5)

AddressDip Switch(SW1)

LEDs

IDNet Terminal Block (TB1)

2-12

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

FACP Operator Interface

Operator Interface The following images show the two operator interfaces which are available with the 4100ES. The Operator Interface is used to obtain alarm, supervisory, trouble and other status via the Liquid Crystal Display and LEDs. Control functions are accessed using dedicated and user-programmable keys.

Figure 2-10 is the standard 2x40 LCD Operator Interface. This model includes a 2 line by 40 character Liquid Crystal Display. Figure 2-11 is the Flexible User Interface. This model includes a multi-line Liquid Crystal Display, which can display more information simultaneously.

Figure 2-10. Operator Interface

Figure 2-11. Flexible User Interface

2-13

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

FACP Expansion Bays

Additional CPU Bay Modules

4100-6030 Service Modem Card. CPU mezzanine card. Provides a connection to remote PCs for diagnostics and programming purposes.

4100-6031 City Card with Disconnect. FACP power supply mezzanine card. Provides two UL-listed city connections to the municipal fire department or other remote supervising station. Contains a hardware disconnect switch to allow for testing without alerting the remote station.

4100-6032 City Card. FACP power supply mezzanine card. Same as the 4100-6031, but without the disconnect and testing option.

4100-6033 Alarm Relay Card. FACP power supply mezzanine card.

4100-6014 Modular Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts to the CPU motherboard. Performs 4100 networking operations. May be installed with the 4100-6056 Wired Media Card, the 4100-6057 Fiber Media Card, and/or the 4100-6055 Modem Media Card.

Expansion Bays An FACP always has one CPU bay, but it may have one or two expansion bays as well. Expansion bays contain a variety of additional modules that the system might require.

Figure 2-12. Expansion Bays

TWO-BAYCABINET

MASTERCONTROLLER BAY(always on top)

EXPANSIONBAY

2-14

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

FACP Power Requirements

System Power The FACP is powered primarily by the FACP power supply, which in turn gets its power from the power distribution module (PDM). The AC branch circuit and the standby battery connect to the PDM. AC and battery power are then distributed to power modules from the PDM via harness.

In expansion bays, the PDM may connect to the following: a secondary system power supply (SPS)*, an extended power supply (EPS) a remote power supply (RPS), an expansion power supply (XPS), or a 100 W Amplifier.

Note: *The 4100-5111/5112/5113 SPS is available for expansion bays only.

Figure 2-13 System Power

Power Requirements

Table 2-6. Power Requirements

SPS

ACBTRY

AC

BTRY

ACBTRY

XPS

XPS SPS = System Power Supply XPS = Expansion Power Supply PDM = Power Distribution Module

PDM

INCOMING AC POWER

BATTERY BATTERY

IMPORTANT: AC power must be provided to the 4100ES from a dedicated branch circuit.

EPS120V, 50/60 Hz, 4.6A each

220/230/240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A each

SPS/XPS/RPS/TPS/100W Amplifier

120V, 60 Hz, 4A each

220/230/240V, 50/60 Hz, 2A each

2-15

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes

Overview Three different sizes of system back boxes are available, accommodating one, two, or three electronics bays. These back boxes are shipped in large containers separate from the system electronics. If system electronics containers are shipped with the back box containers, store the system electronics containers in a safe, clean, and dry location until the back box installation is completed, and you are ready to install the system electronic bays.

Note:

• Conductor entrance and routing restrictions apply to power-limited systems only.

• All back box PIDs are listed in Chapter 1.

Specifications Table 2-7 lists the specifications for the back boxes.

Make sure that you have the necessary hardware before you begin the installation procedure. The Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit should have all of the items listed in Table 2-8.

Table 2-7. Back Box Specifications

PID Number

Description Height Width Rough Opening

Size Weight Box Trim Door Box Height Width

2975-9410/9407/9438

1 Bay 55 lb.(25 kg)

20-¾ in.(527 mm)

23-½ in.(597 mm)

26-3/8 in.(670 mm)

26-3/8 in.(670 mm)

21-¼ in.(540 mm)

26 ¼ in.(667 mm)

2975-9411/9408/9439

2 Bay 125 lb.(57 kg)

36-¼ in.(921 mm)

39-1/8 in.(994 mm)

26-3/8 in.(670 mm)

25-¾ in.(654 mm)

36-¾ in.(933 mm)

26 ¼ in.(667 mm)

2975-9412/9409/9440

3 Bay 185 lb.(84 kg)

52-1/8 in.(1,324 mm)

55 in.(1,397 mm)

26-3/8 in.(670 mm)

25-¾ in.(654 mm)

52 5/8 in.(1,337 mm)

26 ¼ in.(667 mm)

Table 2-8. Contents of the Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit

Part Number DescriptionQuantity Per Back Box

1-Bay Box 2-Bay Box 3-Bay Box

268-010 Lockwasher (No. 8) 4 8 12

490-011 Washer 4 8 12

426-033 Screw (No. 8 Torx, 5/16 in.) 4 8 12

2-16

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)

Mounting the Back Boxes

Mount the back box as shown in Figure 2-14. Use the holes in the back box to secure it to the wall.

• For mounting to a wooden wall structure, the back box must be attached with four 3/8-inch-diameter x 1-½-inch-long (9.5 mm x 38 mm) fasteners and four 3/8-inch-diameter (9.5 mm) washers.

• For surface mounting, secure the box to the wall using the tear-drop mounting holes on the back surface.

• For semi-flush mounting, secure the box to the wall studs using the knockouts on the sides of the box. Note that the front surface of the back box must protrude at least ½ inch (sheet metal door) or 3 inches (plastic door) from the finished wall surface.

IMPORTANT: Power-limited systems have back box entrance and routing restrictions for field wiring. Do not locate power-limited wiring in the shaded areas of the back box shown in Figure 2-14. These areas are reserved for non power-limited circuitry such as AC power, batteries, and the city connection.

Figure 2-14. Back Box Installation DiagramFigure 2-14 notes:1. Dimensions shown are typical for all surface and

semi-flush installations.

2. Use suitable punch when conduit is required. Knockouts are not provided. Locate and create on-site as required during installation.

3. A minimum clearance of 5 inches (127mm) from the hinge side is required to provide a maximum door opening of 90 degrees.

4. Do not install any power-limited wiring in the shaded area of the back box as shown in Figure 2-14. This area is reserved for non power-limited devices and circuits (for example, AC power, batteries, and city circuits). The non power-limited area is determined by the internal barriers, but is always below and to the right of these barriers.

5. Minimum distance between boxes is 3 ¼ inches (83 mm). Maximum distance between boxes is 10 inches (254 mm).

POTPOT

RESERVED FOR BATTERIES (SEE NOTE 6)

ADDITIONAL BACK BOX

USE 4 HOLES TO SECURE BACKBOX TO THE WALL

USE 4 HOLES TO SECURE BACKBOX TO THE WALL

24” (610 mm)

3 17/32” (90 mm)

5 17/32” (140 mm)

16” (406 mm)

See Notes 3 and 5

6 29/32” (175 mm)

22”(559 mm)

(ONEBAY)

ALIGNMENT MARKERSFOR WALL STUDS:6” (152 mm)4” (102 mm)

WALL

WALL

PANELFRONT

2-17

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)

Back Box side views

Figure 2-15. Height off the wall for Back Box and doors (plastic and metal)

11-11/16"(297 mm)

Side view with plastic door attached

8 - 5 /16"(211 mm)

Side view with metal door attached

WALL

WALL

2-18

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics

Overview This section describes the process for removing the CPU and equipment bays that come with the system modules from their shipping container and installing them into the mounted back boxes.

Mounting guidelines:

• The CPU bay must be installed in the top bay of the enclosure.

• Expansion bays mount in any bay area within an enclosure.

• Expansion bays mount in a 19” E.I.A rack console using an adapter kit.

Mounting the System Electronics Bays

Perform the following procedure to install the system electronics bays:

1. Disconnect the 734-008 Harness from P1 on the Power Distribution Interface (PDI).

2. Remove everything from the electronics shipping container, and set the screws aside.

3. Remove the shipping studs that secure the bays to the shipping container.

Figure 2-16. Removing the Shipping Studs

Continued on the next page

2-19

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics (continued)

Mounting the System Electronics Bay

4. Mount the power distribution module (PDM) to the back box as shown in Figure 2-17. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 2-9 for the recommended torque.

Table 2-9. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware

Figure 2-17. Mounting the PDM Bracket (2-Bay Box Shown)

5. If provided, mount the tamper switch assembly to the mounting studs as shown in Figure 2-17. Refer to 4100-Series Tamper Switch Installation Instructions (579-195).

6. Using the hardware provided with the back box, insert the required number of mounting screws to the right and left support holes in the back box as shown in Figure 2-18.

7. Tighten the mounting screws.

Note: Install the mounting screws to within 1/8" from the seated position.

Continued on the next page

Screw / Nut Size Recommended Torque

No. 6 7.9 to 8.7 inch/ounces (569 to 626 cm/grams)

No. 8 16.1 to 17.8 inch/ounces (1 159 to 1 282 cm/grams)

No. 10 26.8 to 29.7 inch/ounces (1 930 to 2 139 cm/grams)

PDMMOUNTING AREA

TAMPER SWITCH MOUNTING STUDS

PDMCOVER

Use spacers to secure PDM to cabinet

PDMCONNECTORS

INSULATOR

CABINETSTANDOFF

2-20

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics (continued)

Mounting the System Electronic Bay

8. Mount the system electronics bay assemblies in the back box by carefully placing the assembly onto the four extended screws in the back box, allowing the electronics bay assembly to hang from the screws.

9. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 2-9 for the recommended torque.

Figure 2-18. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly

At this point, the system is ready for system card installation. For information on card installation, refer to the Panels’ installation manual.

IMPORTANT: Do not apply power to the system at this time.

2-21

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional)

Trim Kit Content Trim Kits are used to cosmetically cover wall openings when boxes are mounted semi-flush into the wall. The kit includes:

• Two top trim bands (shorter)

• Two side trim bands (longer)

• Four corner pieces.

Figure 2-19. Semi-Flush Trim Kit

Trim Application After the back box is mounted to the wall, attach the trim in accordance with the following procedure:

1. Hold the top strip against the top of the back box.

2. Centered the strip on the box width, and mark the end locations (the top bands are approximately 1" (25 mm) shorter than the box width). Peel off the adhesive tape release, align it with the marks and press down to assure adhesion.

3. Place the second top strip beneath the back box and repeat step 2.

4. The side bands are sized for the 3-bay box, they must be re-sized for use with 1 and 2 bay boxes.

• For use with a 3-bay box: align, mark, and attach as was done for the top and bottom bands.

• For use with a 1-bay or 2-bay boxes, cut the bands approximately 1" (25mm) shorter than the box height (1-bay boxes are 22" (559 mm) high, 2-bay boxes are 40" (1016 mm) high). Carefully cut them to length using a hacksaw or sharp utility knife.

5. Attach the cut bands using the same procedure as the top and bottom bands.

6. Each corner piece overlaps the trim strip slightly less than 3/4" (19mm). Align the corner pieces tight to the box corner and attach with a drywall or similar screw, suitable for the wall material (screws are not supplied).

Figure 2-20. Applying the Trim

Corner Pieces (x4)

Top Trim Bands (x2)

Side Trim Bands (x2)

Semi-Flush Mounted BACK BOX

2-22

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 4. Mounting the Door

Overview This section describes how to hang and attach glass and solid doors to the back box.

Additionally, this section describes how to reverse doors so that their hinges are on the right and locks are on the left.

Figure 2-21. Front and Back View of a Glass Door

Figure 2-22. Front and Back view of a Solid Door

Front View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door Back View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door

DoorHinges

Grounding Wires

Lock

Grounding Wires

Front View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door Back View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door

DoorHinges

Lock

2-23

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 4. Mounting the Door (continued)

Attaching Doors Read the following instructions to attach glass or solid doors to the back box. Note that the hinges and lock catch should already be attached.

Note: A 5/16 hex nut driver is required to complete the following steps.1. Unscrew the lock catch from the back box and retain the hardware.

2. Flip the lock catch over, and re-attach it to the back box so that the slot now protrudes to the outside of the back box. See Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23. Reversing the Lock Catch

3. Remove the door from the packaging.

4. For glass doors:

• Fit the dress panel onto the back box using the grooves on the dress panel as guides.

• Secure the dress panel to the back box using the #6 torx screw provided. See Figure 2-24.

5. Align the door hinges with the hinge pins on the back box, and slide the door down onto the hinge pins.

Figure 2-25. Hinge Pin Alignment

Continued on the next page

Lock Catchposition uponreception

Lock catchonce properly installed

Secure with #6 Screw

Figure 2-24. Securing the Dress Panel

Door Hinge

Cabinet Hinge Pin

2-24

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 4. Mounting the Door (continued)

Attaching Doors 6. Attach the two ground wires to the back box with the # 6 hex flange nuts in the shipping group (the grounding straps should already be attached to the door). See Figure 2-26.

Figure 2-26. The Ground Wire7. Remove the B-key that is attached to the door and keep it in a safe place.

Reversing the Door

Read the following instructions to reverse doors so that their hinges are on the right and locksare on the left. Be sure to retain all hardware.

Note: A 5/16 hex nut driver is required to complete the following steps.

1. Disconnect the ground wires from the back box and set them aside.

2. Remove the door (if attached) by lifting it up off the back box’s hinge pins. Set the door aside.

3. Remove the lock catch and its screws from the right side of the back box.

4. Attach the lock catch to the left side of the back box so that the slot protrudes through the outside of the back box.

5. Use a 1/8 (3mm) punch and hammer to remove the hinge pins from the hinge leaves on the back box.

6. Reinsert the hinge pins so that they face lengthwise toward the bottom of the back box.

7. Remove all hinge hardware from the left side of the back box.

8. Attach the hinge hardware to the right side of the back box, so that the hinge pins are facing toward the top of the back box.

9. Turn the door upside down, align its hinges to the back box hinge pins, and then slide the door down onto the hinge pins.

10. Re-attach the ground-wire and flange nut to the back box and door.

11. Remove the B-key that is attached to the door, and keep it in a safe place.

Back Box

Door

Ground Wire

2-25

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay

Overview This section contains placement guidelines and physical installation instructions on installing traditional aftermarket motherboards into the 4100ES CPU bay.

Notes: • If you do not need to install individual motherboards into the CPU bay, but need to install aftermarket modules into expansion bays, skip to Step 7.

• If you do not need to install any aftermarket modules at all, and if you have followed Steps 1 through 5, you have completed the panel installation and can apply power using the power-up and power-down procedures.

4100ES CPU Bay Placement Guidelines

Refer to the following guidelines before mounting a motherboard into a CPU bay.

• There are eight 2” (51 mm) slots on the CPU bay. Slots 1 and 2 are the only available slots for aftermarket boards.

• If there are more old style 4100 modules than a CPU bay can accommodate, they should be placed into the next expansion bay.

• For SPS Configuration only: CPU bays do not include a power distribution interface (PDI) board, so this bay is reserved for motherboard/daughter card modules only.

Figure 2-27. CPU Bay Card Placement

CPU MasterMotherboard

2“ Motherboards

Chassis

Power Supply

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8

2-26

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays

Overview This section contains placement guidelines and physical installation instructions on installing 4” X 5” cards and traditional motherboards into 4100ES electronics bays.

4100ES Placement Guidelines

Refer to the following guidelines before mounting 4” X 5” cards and/or motherboards to an expansion bay.

• Each expansion bay assembly includes a chassis, two end supports, one LED/switch frame, and a power distribution interface (PDI) board.

• An expansion bay holds up to eight 4” X 5” modules. A double-size module, such as the expansion power supply (XPS), takes up two blocks of space as shown below.

• Cards must be added from right to left.

Figure 2-28. Expansion Bay 4” X 5” Card Placement

IMPORTANT: This section applies to aftermarket modules for expansion bays only. If you do not need to install any aftermarket modules at all, and if you have followed Steps 1 through 6, you have completed the panel installation and can apply AC power.

2-27

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)

Motherboard Placement Guidelines for a 4100ES bay

• Motherboards can be installed on top of the PDI in expansion bays. The data and power that would normally be bussed via the PDI is instead routed across the boards by a connector from one board to the next.

• Up to eight 2” x 11 ½” motherboards can be installed in an expansion bay if no 4” x 5” modules are installed in the bay, and if the pins on the left connector (usually P1) on the leftmost motherboard are removed.

• Motherboards must be added from left to right.

• Relay motherboards must be the rightmost motherboards.

Figure 2-29. Expansion Bay Motherboard Placement

Power Distribution Interface

dB noitp

O 0014

dB noitp

O 0014

dB noitp

O 0014

dB noitp

O 0014

dB noitp

O 0014

dB noitp

O 0014

dB noit p

O 0014

Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8Slot 1

This SlotMust

RemainEmpty

This slot cannot contain a motherboard unless the pins on P1 (or leftmost pin connector) are removed.

Up to eight 2” x 11 ½” motherboards can be mounted in an expansion bay. Seven motherboards fit into Slots 2 through 8; the

eighth can be added in Slot 1 if its leftpost pins are removed.

2-28

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)

Mixed 4100 Motherboard/4100ES 4”x5” Card Placement Guidelines

• As shown in Figure 2-30, motherboards can be installed alongside 4” X 5” cards, if necessary.

Figure 2-30. Mixed Module Placement

2-29

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)

Installing 4 X 5 Cards

The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The PDI contains slots for up to eight 4 x 5 slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4 x 5 cards.

Use the following instructions and Figure 2-31 to mount slave cards to an expansion cabinet.

1. Screw two standoffs and washers to the appropriate holes in the back of the cabinet. These holes must line up with the screw holes in the card.

2. Plug the card into the appropriate blind mating connector. Seat the card firmly onto the PDI when installing to ensure complete insertion of the power connector into the PDI.

3. Secure the top of the card to the standoffs with two #6 torx screws and washers.

Figure 2-31. Slave Card/PDI Connection

4” X 5” CARD

STANDOFFS

#6 SCREWS

WASHERS

PDI CONNECTOR (reverse side)

PDI

SCREWRETAINERS

2-30

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)

Installing Motherboards into a 4100ES Expansion Bay

Use the following procedure when installing motherboards in an expansion bay. Start with the second slot from the left and fill to the right.1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1

on the left.

2. Attach four metal threaded standoffs and lockwashers into the screw holes on the chassis.3. Attach two grey plastic standoffs to the motherboard socket mounting screws.4. Secure the motherboard to the standoffs using four #6 torx screws as shown below.

Figure 2-32. Installing the Motherboard in a 4100ES Expansion Bay

#6 SCREWS

LOCKWASHERS

METALSTANDOFFS

SCREW HOLES

SCREW HOLES

PLASTIC STANDOFFS

2-31

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays

Overview Each card has to be interconnected with every other card in its bay. At the same time, bays in the FACP also have to be connected together. Read this section to ensure that cards and bays are interconnected.

Guidelines Review the following guidelines before interconnecting modules and bays.

• The FACP power supply provides 24 VDC power to the CPU motherboard.

• The CPU motherboard provides 8 V (3 A capacity) for use by Legacy 4100 slave cards. 24 VDC card power is routed through the motherboard for slave card use.

• 4100 internal comms and power are harnessed to other bays. Do not connect the 8 V at P7 to an 8 V converter on a Goldwing or remote interface card.

• 24 VDC card power from the FACP power supply is rated at 2 A.

• Additional harnesses are provided with the shipping group, but may not be used at the time of installation. These harnesses should remain with control equipment for future use when necessary.

Power Distribution Module Connections

The power distribution module (PDM) connects to the EPS, SPS, RPS, or XPS in each bay. One PDM is used per back box. Use the instructions below to properly connect the PDM to each bay.

1. Route the black and white AC power wires to the supplied ferrite bead. Loop the wires twice through the bead as shown in Figure 2-33.

Figure 2-33. Wiring Looped Through Ferrite Bead

2. Wire 120 VAC to the PDM, keeping AC wires at least 1 inch away from all other wires. AC power must stay in the right side of the cabinet, in the non-power-limited area.

3. Connect batteries to P5 on the PDM using Harness 734-015. Bend the wire near the PDM so that it occupies the back of the cabinet.

Continued on the next page

TO AC BREAKER

TO PDM

2-32

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

Power Distribution Module Connections

4. Connect the PDM to the power supply using Harness 734-012 for 120 V systems (734-013 for 220/230/240 V versions).

• Feed red and black wires through the side rail to the front of the power supply to prevent wire damage when the front panel is inserted.

• Connect the separate red and black wires (with yellow female terminations) to plugs P2 (black) and P3 (red) on the EPS and plugs P5 (black) and P4 (red) on the SPS or RPS.

• Connect the white and black wires, which terminate together in a white snap-on connector, to the bulkhead connector at the bottom of the EPS, SPS or RPS assembly, as shown in Figure 2-34.

Figure 2-34. FACP Power Supply Assembly Connector (EPS shown)

Continued on the next page

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5

EPS

120 V TO TRANSFORMER THROUGH BULKHEAD CONNECTOR

RED WIRE

BLACK WIRE P2P3

BATTERY HARNESS

FUSED AT 20 A

HARNESS 733-015 TO 24 V BATTERY

HARNESS(734-257)

(734-258)*

GROUND

BACK BOX GROUND SCREW

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS APPEAR IN ITALICS.

CA

V022

CA

V032

CA

V042

TU

EN

50/60 Hz 2.3 A

566-248PDM TERMINAL

BLOCK

120 V NEUTRAL

120 VAC 50, 60 Hz, 4.6 A

FERRITEBEAD

PDM(566-246) (or 566-248; see below)*

Bottom viewof the EPS assembly

Bulkhead connector

Second bulkheadconnector here in 220/ 230/240 Vversion

2-33

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

Power Distribution Module Connections

5. Connect the 734-012 Harness (734-013 for 220/230/240 V versions) from the next connector on the PDM to the first XPS or EPS.

• Connect the separate red and black wires (with yellow female terminations) to the battery plugs on the respective power supplies.

• Connect the white and black wires, which terminate together in a white snap-on connector, to the connector at the bottom of the power supply assembly, as shown below. The black wire must be closer to the wall at the power supply connection point.

6. Repeat step 5 for the second power supply, if applicable. Note: AC wiring is supervised.

Figure 2-35. XPS/PDM Connection

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5

XPSASSEMBLY

Bulkhead connector

HARNESS 734-015 TO 24 V BATTERY

RED WIRE

BLACK WIRE

P5P4

BATTERY HARNESS

FUSED AT 15 A

GROUND

BACK BOX GROUND SCREW

PDM(566-246) (or 566-248; see below)*

HARNESS(734-012)

(734-013)*

C

AV 022

C

AV 032

C

AV 042T

UE

N50/60 Hz

2 A

566-248PDM TERMINAL

BLOCK

Additional bulkhead connector supplied here with 220/230/240 V systems

120 V NEUTRAL

120 VAC 60 Hz, 4 A

FERRITEBEAD

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS APPEAR IN ITALICS.

2-34

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

SPS CPU Card Interconnections in the CPU Bay

Use the following directions to connect the CPU to the SPS and other motherboards (refer to Figure 2-36).

1. Connect P8 on the SPS to P1 on the CPU motherboard using the eight-position Molex minifit connector (provided).

2. Make sure connector P3 on the CPU is secured to J1 on the next motherboard to the left. Repeat this for the third (leftmost) motherboard, if applicable.

SPS CPU Card Interconnections in Expansion Bays

Expansion bays comprise all bays other than the CPU bay. If you are installing a two- or three-bay FACP, you will be using expansion bays (refer to Figure 2-38).The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The PDI contains slots for up to eight 4” X 5” slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4” X 5” cards. Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ” for instructions on mounting 4” X 5” cards to the PDI. Also bear in mind the following variations:

• In a remote expansion cabinet, a transponder interface card (TIC) requires additional interconnections. This occurs in MINIPLEX systems. Refer to Chapter 3.

• Regular motherboards require non-PDI interconnections to each other and to the CPU. Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays.”

SPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections

Panels with two or three bays must be interconnected properly so that they function together as the central point of a standalone or MINIPLEX system, or as a node on a network.

Generally, the CPU bay connects to a local expansion bay using a circuit from CPU to the expansion bay’s PDI. If there is a second expansion bay, the PDI on the first expansion bay connects to the PDI on the second.

Note: Interconnections can become more involved if regular motherboards are used. Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays” if this is the case.

• To connect from the CPU bay to an expansion bay, route the 734-008 Harness from P2, P3, or P4 on the CPU motherboard to P1 on the PDI in the adjacent bay.

• To connect two adjacent expansion bays, route the 734-008 Harness from P2 or P3 on the first PDI to P1 on the PDI in the next bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 2 and 3 (right) to provide card power to the bay from a power supply (SPS, XPS, or RPS) located in the same bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 1 and 2 (left) to provide card power to the bay from P1 on the PDI.

2-35

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

SPS Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections

Figure 2-36 shows the interconnections between three bays in a host panel.

Figure 2-36. Bay-to-Bay Interconnections

For information on remote expansion bays, refer to Appendix B.

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACEASSY 566-084

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACEASSY 566-084

HARNESS734-008

P8

733-996HARNESS(LEGACY SYSTEMS)

P1

P1

P2

P3P4P5P6P7

P1

P2

P3P4P5P6P7

J1/P3

P10P2P3P4

P6

2-36

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

EPS CPU Bay Interconnections

For the New Configuration:

• The FACP power supply and the CPU master motherboard are connected through the PDI board.

• Connect the power supply’s “RUI+ Earth Detect” (P9 on the EPS card) to the Earth Fault (P1) on the RUI+ CPU Motherboard card.

• To connect the RUI+ CPU Motherboard to adjacent cards that do not communicate through the PDI (2” motherboards for example), insert a male-male 10 pin header into the Motherboards’s female ten pin header (J8) and insert the other end into the adjacent card.

EPS CPU Interconnections in Expansion Bays

Expansion bays comprise all bays other than the CPU bay. If you are installing a two- or three-bay FACP, you will be using expansion bays (refer to Figure 2-38).The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The PDI contains slots for up to eight 4” X 5” slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4” X 5” cards. Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ” for instructions on mounting 4” X 5” cards to the PDI. Also bear in mind the following variations:

• In a remote expansion cabinet, a transponder interface card (TIC) requires additional interconnections. This occurs in MINIPLEX systems. Refer to Chapter3.

• Regular motherboards require non-PDI interconnections to each other and to the CPU. Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays.”

EPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections

Panels with two or three bays must be interconnected properly so that they function together as the central point of a standalone or MINIPLEX system, or as a node on a network.

• The CPU bay can be connected to a local expansion bay by connecting the P2 or P3 connector on the left end of the CPU PDI card to the expansion bay’s PDI P1 connector.

Figure 2-37 shows a typical interconnect using P2 on the CPU PDI to P1 of the first expansion bay.

• To connect two adjacent expansion bays, route the 734-008 Harness from P2 or P3 on the first PDI to P1 on the PDI in the next bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 2 and 3 (right) to provide card power to the bay from a power supply (EPS, SPS, XPS, or RPS) located in the same bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 1 and 2 (left) to provide card power to the bay from P1 on the PDI.

Note: Interconnections can become more involved if regular motherboards are used. Refer to “Installing Modules into Expansion Bays” if this is the case.

Continued on the next page

2-37

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

EPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections

Figure 2-37 shows the basic CPU interconnections in a 4100ES EPS FACP.

Figure 2-37. Basic CPU Interconnections

For information on remote expansion bays, refer to Appendix B.

Connecting to 4100 Motherboards

Panels with motherboards on the left side of the expansion bays require some non-PDI connections. If you need to connect a harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure 2-38 and follow these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.

1. Connect one end of the 733-525 Harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay. If the adjacent bay is a CPU bay with no additional motherboards, connect the harness to the P8 and P7 connectors of the CPU motherboard.

• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P8 connector. Note that the P8 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P7 connector. Note that the P7 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Continued on the next page

RUI+ MOTHERBOARD 566-938

EPS PCB 566-873

CPU BAY

CPU BAY TOEXPANSION BAY

HARNESS (734-008)

EXPANSION BAY PDIs

P1P2P3

P1P2P3

P1P2P3

P2

P3

2-38

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

Connecting to 4100 Motherboards

If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay or a CPU bay with additional motherboards, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If 4100-6052 DACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the motherboard in the second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:

• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.

• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Figure 2-38. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards

Chassis

Connector with Blue Wire Goes

to P2

Connector with White Wire Goes

to P3

733-525 Harness

Blue

White

2-39

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 8. Configuring Cards

Overview The all cards and modules in the CPU FACP back box must be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. This section describes the hardware configuration for the CPU components.

RUI+ Master Motherboard Configuration

The CPU motherboard must be jumpered as follows (refer to Figure 2-2):

P6 determines whether the RUI SHIELD signal is connected to 24 C or earth.

• Position 1 – 2: SHIELD to 24 C (default).

• Position 2 – 3: SHIELD to earth. Note: Some devices that connect to RUI have inherently grounded shield terminals, in which case 24 C

cannot be used. If 24 C is used, a Negative Ground Fault will occur.

RUI+ Isolation: By default the RUI channel of the RUI+ Master motherboard is set to isolated mode. This provides better noise immunity in larger systems. If you are using an RUI+ Master Motherboard to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-4007 (RCU), move jumpers P5 and P6 to the RUI NON ISO position.

P5 and P6Position 1-2: RUI is isolated (default)Position 2-3: RUI is not isolated (use for RCU/SCU compatibility)

SW1 and SW2 are used to set the CPU motherboard up to be attached to either a network card or a RS-232/2120 card.

• On: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).

• Off: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.

Master Controller Daughter Card Configuration

The master controller daughter card must be jumpered as follow (refer to Figure 2-6):

P1 is used for engineering diagnostics (COMLAB).

• Position 1 – 2: Download or no connection.

• Position 2 – 3: Diagnostic mode.

P3 configures the RAM battery as ON or OFF.

• Position 1 – 2: ON.

• Position 2 – 3: OFF.

2-40

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 8. Configuring Cards (continued)

SPS Configuration

SW1: Using DIP switch SW1, set the SPS device address. Use the address table in Appendix A.

P1: Earth connect jumper. Note that the P1 location is clearly designated on the PCB silk screen.

• Position 1 – 2: Enables Earth fault monitoring.

• Position 2 – 3: Disables Earth fault monitoring.

Only one power module should be set for earth fault monitoring for each location within a system. Normally, the SPS in the CPU bay is set to monitor for earth faults. If there is a second SPS connected to the same set of batteries, that SPS should have earth fault monitoring disabled. Other power modules that can be set to monitor earth fault conditions are TPS, RPS and XBC. When located under common 0V with a TPS, the TPS should be set to monitor earth faults, and other co-located power modules should be set to disable earth fault monitoring.

P2: If the SPS IDNet outputs are being used, you may change P2 to configure the IDNet shield connection. Note that the P2 pin 1 location is towards P3.

• Position 1 – 2: Connects the shield to 0 V (default).

• Position 2 – 3: Connects the shield to earth ground.

P3: City Card and Relay Card operation. Note that the P3 pin 1 location is towards P2.

• Position 1-2: Install in pos. 1-2 only if a relay card 4100-6033 is installed and has relay 3 programmed for operation other than "Trouble"

• Position 2-3: (default) For City Card operation and for use with 4100-6033 if relay 3 is programmed for "activate on trouble" operation

Note: Refer to Chapter 5 for additional SPS configuration information. Refer to chapter 8 for SPS wiring information.

EPS Configuration

SW2: Use this switch to set the EPS address as identified in the Panel Programmer job.Use the address table in Appendix A.

P18: The Earth Fault Enable/Disable jumper allows you to enable or disable positive and negative Earth Fault detection.

• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2

• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3

P16: The Battery Disconnect jumper can be set so that the FACP shuts down if the battery levels are too low, instead of letting the system run with diminished capacities. Enabling this function is mandatory for FACPs installed in Canada.

• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3

• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2

PDI Configuration P4/P5: The PDI can be configured to draw its power from different sources via P4 and P5.

• To provide power to the EPS CPU bay, set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 2-3.

• To draw power from an XPS, SPS, RPS, TPS, or EPS on the PDI, set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 2 – 3.

• To draw power from P1 (from the XPS, TPS, EPS, SPS or RPS), set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 1 – 2 (default).

• To remove power from the PDI, remove the jumper from P4.

Configuring Other Cards

Refer to the appropriate installation instructions to configure other cards that are located in CPU and expansion bays. Refer to Appendix E for a list of publications.

2-41

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries

Installing and Removing Batteries in a One Bay Cabinet

To install the batteries:

1. Remove the batteries from the packaging and inspect them for any damage.

2. Tilt the first battery towards you and insert it into the space at the bottom of the cabinet.

3. Once inside the cabinet, tilt the battery back to an upright position and slide it to the right of the cabinet.

4. Repeat the proceeding two steps with the second battery and make sure it is snugly positioned beside the first battery.

5. Once both batteries are in place remove the terminal protectors from the batteries.

6. Connect the batteries to the panel using the battery harness:

• Connect the positive terminal of the left battery to the positive battery input on the panel using the red cable.

• Connect the negative terminal of the right battery to the negative battery input on the panel using the black cable.

• Use the white jumper cable to connect the two remaining battery terminals, joining the two batteries.

7. Power up the panel following the instructions in “Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures” on page 43.

To remove the batteries: 1. Power Down the Panel following

the instructions in “Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures” on page 43. Figure 2-39. One Bay Battery Installation

2. Remove the harness from the batteries.3. Fit the battery terminals with terminal protectors.4. Remove the batteries from the cabinet by tilting them towards you, then taking them out of

the cabinet.5. Dispose of the old batteries properly.

Jumper

NegativePositive

2-42

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries (continued)

Installing and Removing Batteries in a Multi-Bay Cabinet

To install the batteries:

1. Remove the batteries from the packaging and inspect them for any damage.

2. Place the batteries at the bottom of the cabinet, center them and gently push them against the back wall.

3. Once the batteries are in place remove the terminal protectors from the batteries.

4. Connect the batteries to the panel using the battery harness:

• Connect the positive terminal of the left battery to the positive battery input on the panel using the red cable.

• Connect the negative terminal of the right battery to the negative battery input on the panel using the black cable.

• Use the white jumper cable to connect the two remaining battery terminals, joining the two batteries.

5. Power up the panel following the instructions in “Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures” on page 43.

To remove the batteries: 1. Power Down the Panel following

the instructions in “Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures” on page 43.

2. Remove the harness from the batteries.

3. Fit the battery terminals with terminal protectors.

4. Remove the batteries from the cabinet.

Dispose of the old batteries properly. Figure 2-40. Multi-Bay Battery Installation

2-43

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures

System Power Up Procedure

Power-Up Procedure:1. Connect only the negative (black) lead of the power supply/charger to the battery.

2. Close and lock the front panel door.

3. Have the appropriate personnel apply AC power to the system from the dedicated circuit breaker or fused disconnect.

4. Ensure the panel has started properly, observing all safety procedures appropriate for a system with AC power applied.

5. Open the panel door and acknowledge all abnormal conditions including the battery disconnected trouble condition.

6. Connect the positive (red) lead of the power supply/charger to the battery.

7. Ensure the battery trouble has cleared.

8. Install the panel cover plate (when present), close and lock the door.

System Power Down Procedure

•

Power-Down Procedure:1. Unlock and open the panel door and remove the cover plate (when present), observing

appropriate safety procedures and warnings when the system has AC power present

2. Disconnect only the positive (red) lead of the power supply/charger from the battery

3. Have appropriate personnel remove AC power from the system from the dedicated circuit breaker or fused disconnect

4. Mark or tag the circuit breaker or fused disconnect indicating it is off for service

IMPORTANT:• Never connect or disconnect power on a 4100ES by

removing the connector from the PDM. This could cause an improper order of power disconnection which may shorten the product life.

• If this procedure is not followed, you may cause damage to the system and/or create a shock hazard.

WARNING:• Use caution when handling batteries - they can store

significant energy and present a shock hazard. When transporting used batteries, be certain the terminals are removed and/or insulated so they cannot make contact with conductive objects and create a safety hazard.

• Use caution when AC power is present. The panel must have power removed while you are performing service on the system.

!

2-44

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

The Terminal Block Utility Module

Overview The 4100-0632 Terminal Block Utility Module is an all-purpose terminal block that mounts to an electronics bay, above or below the power distribution interface (PDI). Each module utilizes one block of mounting space.

The terminal block utility module has two 16-position terminal blocks that accept up to a maximum of 12 AWG wire.

Mounting to the Electronics Bay

Follow the directions below to mount the terminal block utility module to the electronics bay.

1. Align the terminal block utility module to any two compatible screw holes on the electronics bay. Position the higher terminal block towards the middle of the bay. There are eight possible locations: four above and four below the PDI. Refer to Figure 2-41.

2. Secure the terminal block utility module to the electronics bay with two #6 screws and lockwashers.

3. The shorting strip may be removed or modified, depending on the application.

Figure 2-41. Terminal Block Utility Module Mounting

TERMINAL BLOCK UTILITY MODULE

#6 SCREW AND LOCKWASHER

SCREW HOLES FOR MODULE BRACKET

SCREW HOLES FOR MODULE BRACKET

2-45

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

2-46

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

3-1

Chapter 3

Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction MINIPLEX transponder interface cards (TICs) allow for data and power interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. This chapter describes the transponder installation procedure for 4100ES MINIPLEX systems.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders 3-2

MINIPLEX System Guidelines 3-7

Configuring Cards 3-8

TIC/Riser Mounting 3-9

TIC/Motherboard Interconnections 3-10

RUI Wiring 3-11

MINIPLEX Audio Wiring 3-12

3-2

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders

Overview The 4100ES MINIPLEX system is comprised of a host panel containing everything required in a standalone cabinet (see Chapter 3), plus:

• One or more remote MINIPLEX transponder cabinets

• A transponder interface card (TIC) in each transponder cabinet

This section describes each component.

Transponder Cabinets

RUI Communication wiring from the RUI module in the host panel extends to a transponder interface card (TIC) in a remote transponder cabinet. The transponder cabinet is simply a 2975-94xx Back Box with at least one TIC module in it, and can have one, two, or three bays.

Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) and Audio Riser Modules

The following TICs, audio risers, and audio riser controller modules are available for 4100ES MINIPLEX ® systems:

• Basic Transponder Interface Card (TIC) Module

• Local Mode TIC Module

• Analog Audio Riser Module

• Digital Audio Riser Module

• Network Audio Riser Controller Module

Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) receive data from 4100ES host panels allowing remote locations to perform fire alarm functions. TIC modules are optionally available with local mode operation that provides basic (degraded mode) system functions in the event of a communication loss with the master panel. TICs receive communications from the 4100ES host panel using Remote Interface (RUI) communications with either Style 4 or Style 7 wiring.

For audio systems, audio riser modules are required and are connected directly to TIC modules via ribbon cable. Audio riser modules support Class A and Class B analog wiring, as well as Style 4 and Style 7 digital audio wiring.

Basic TICs The basic TIC is an addressable device that contains an RUI input, audio riser module interface, and a port for connecting to other transponder modules.The basic TICs use the same board, with some variations:

• The basic TIC is an addressable device that contains RUI outputs, an audio riser output, a user interface output, and a port for connecting to motherboards.

• The only connectors on the addressable network audio interface module are the audio riser output and a user interface output.

3-3

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)

The Local Mode TIC

The local mode TIC contains an RUI input, audio riser module interface, port for connecting to other transponder modules, and terminal block for connecting to an optional Local Mode Controller. Local Mode Controllers are mounted remotely from the transponder and are available in red or beige (flush or surface mount). Model numbers are 4601-9108, -9109, -9110, and -9111. Installation instructions are supplied with the controller.

Local mode operation allows a TIC to provide life safety operations in the event of a communication loss with the master controller. More specifically, this provision means that fire alarm inputs and outputs within the transponder cabinet can still work in a limited capacity to allow continued functioning of local initiating devices and notification appliances connected to the TIC. Local mode is considered a “degraded” mode of operation because full fire alarm system functionality is not guaranteed.

Because the TIC is a slave module that occupies an RUI address, it can indicate a trouble condition to the master controller in the event of a hardware failure. When local mode is initiated, all slave devices locally connected to the TIC are notified by the TIC that local mode is taking effect. From that point until communication is restored to the master controller, the TIC “group-polls” all connected local slaves, and the slaves respond only in the event of an alarm input activation. Other status changes, including troubles, are not reported.

TIC Audio Risers Audio risers are used when digital or analog audio is being transmitted to the transponder cabinet. They are always mounted directly beneath the TIC, on the leftmost side of the transponder bay.

Refer to publication 574-844: Communication and audio interface modules installation

instructions to obtain configuration information for 4100-0621, -0622, and -1341 Audio riser modules.

3-4

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)

TIC Illustrations Figure 3-1 is an illustration of the various TIC and audio riser circuit boards.

Figure 3-1. Transponder Interface Cards

0566-1166BASIC TIC

0566-1167LOCAL MODE TIC

3-5

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)

Local Mode Specifications

Local Mode is supported by the following:

• 4100-3101/3104/3105 IDNet Card

• 4100-3106 IDNet Quick Connect Card

• 4100-3109 IDNet 2 Card

• 4100-3110 IDNet 2+2 Card

• 4100-5101/5102/5103 Expansion Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)

• 4100-5111/5112/5113 System Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)

• 4100-5125/5126/5127 Remote Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)

• 4100-5120/5121/5122 TrueAlert Power Supply NACs

• 4100-1214 to -1225, 4100-1228 to -1239, 4100-1314 to -1325, 4100-1328 to -1339 100W Amplifier NACs

• 4100-1212/1213/1226/1227/1312/1313/1326/1327 Flex 50 Amplifier NACs

• 4009-9401 TrueAlert Addressable Controller

• 4100-1270 Phone Controller and 4100-1272/1273 Phone NAC cards

• 4009-9201/9301 IDNet NAC Extender

• 4100-5116 Expansion Signal Card

• 4100-6077 MX Digital Loop Card

Local Mode is NOT supported by, but can co-exist with, the following:

• 4100 Legacy cards

• 4100-3101 to 3103 Auxiliary Relay cards

• 4100-6048 VESDA Interface Kit

• 4100-6043/6044 RS-232/2120 Interfaces

• 4100-1280 to 1287 LED/Switch Annunciators

• 4100-1290 24-Point Graphic I/O Module

• 4602-9101 SCU/ 4602-9102 RCU

• 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator

• 4100-1210/1211/1311 Audio Controller Board

• 4100-6014 Network Interface Card

• 4100-6052 DACT

• 4100-3115 XA Loop Interface Card

• 4100-6065 BMUX COMMs Module

• 4100-6066 TFX Loop Interface

Bear in mind the following limitations when local mode is in effect:

• If an alarm is already activated when local mode is initiated, the alarm remains activated in local mode.

• Software zones are not supported. Basic TrueAlert channels are supported.

• Alarm verification is not supported. All alarms are reported immediately.

• SMPL is not supported.

• TrueAlarm sensors have fixed thresholds.

3-6

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)

LEDs The TICs have the following LEDs:

LED1. Illuminates to indicate communication loss with the CPU.

LED2. Illuminates when an RUI ground fault search is active.

LED3. Illuminates when Local Mode is active.

LED4. Illuminates to indicate an RUI Style 7 primary trouble.

LED5. Illuminates to indicate an RUI Style 7 secondary trouble.

Note: • Refer to Figure 3-1 to see which LEDs are included on which TIC. Most TICs do not contain all LEDs.• Refer to publication 574-844: Communication and audio interface modules installation instructions, to

obtain LED information for 4100-0621, 4100-0622, and 4100-1341 audio riser modules

Card Specifications

Table 3-1 lists the specifications for all TICs.

Table 3-1.TIC Specifications

Electrical Specifications

Input Voltage 18-33 VDC

Output Voltage 8 V @ 1 A; 100 mV p-p ripple

Input Current 36 mA for all TICs. 82 mA for a local mode TIC connected to a local mode controller.

Environmental Specifications

Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)

Humidity 10% to 93% relative humidity at 90°F (32°C)

3-7

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

MINIPLEX System Guidelines

Overview The rules on this page apply exclusively to MINIPLEX systems. Review each guideline before installing a MINIPLEX 4100ES system.

Guidelines • All wiring is 18 AWG (minimum) and 12 AWG (maximum).

• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.

• All wiring that leaves the building requires overvoltage protection. Install module inside an UL-Listed electrical box wherever wire enters or exits the building. A maximum of four 2081-9044 Modules may be connected to one channel. The 2081-9044 is rated for 200 mA (maximum).

• For Style 4 operation:

- The maximum distance to any device is 2,500 feet (762 m).

- “T” taps are allowed.

- The total maximum cable load (including all “T” taps) is 10,000 feet (3,048 m).

- Maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58 uF. For applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance from line to line plus the shield to either line is no more than 0.58 uF.

• For Style 6 or Style 7 operation, the maximum loop distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). “T” taps are not allowed.

• RUI comms are wired to remote cabinets from the CPU motherboard to one of the following transponder interface cards: 4100-0620 or 4100-0625.

• Annunciators and transponder interface cards support Style 7 operation when the system is wired Class A.

• The master control panel must be a 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel.

• The Style 4 RUI card supports MINIPLEX transponders and 4602/4603 serial annunciators on the same signaling line circuit.

• Up to 4 RUI cards in the 4100ES Control Panel can be used for distributing transponder wiring in different directions or for supporting different wiring requirements (such as using a Style 7 RUI for serial annunciators).

• Up to 31 transponders can be controlled from the 4100ES Control Panel, and can be distributed as required among the RUI cards.

• A maximum of 30 RUI devices between each TIC is supported.

Note: Old legacy, basic, and local mode TICs have been replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement boards listed below are functionally equivalent to the legacy boards.

Table 3-1

Name Legacy Card New Card

Basic Transponder Interface Card 0566-093 0566-1166

Local Transponder Interface Card 0566-094 0566-1167

3-8

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Configuring Cards

Overview The TIC and all other cards to be mounted in the transponder cabinet and attached expansion bays must be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. The CPU motherboard may have to be configured as well.

TIC Configuration The TIC must be assigned a device address via DIP switch SW1. Refer to Appendix A for the address switch table.

CPU Motherboard DIP Switch (SPS Configuration Only)

P9 on the CPU motherboard determines whether the RUI SHIELD signal is connected to 24 C or earth.

• Position 1 – 2: SHIELD to 24 VDC (default).

• Position 2 – 3: SHIELD to Earth.

Some devices that connect to RUI have inherently grounded shield terminals, in which case 24 C cannot be used. If 24 C is used, a Negative Ground Fault will occur.

Configuring Other Cards

Refer to the appropriate publication to configure other cards that are located in the transponder cabinet and attached expansion bays.

3-9

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

TIC/Riser Mounting

Overview All TICs and audio riser cards are mounted like any 4 x 5 card. This section describes the TIC/audio riser card mounting procedure, which is identical to that of other 4 x 5 cards.

Mounting Instructions

Use the following instructions and Figure 3-2 to mount 4 x 5 slave cards to an expansion cabinet.

1. Screw two standoffs and washers to the appropriate holes in the back of the cabinet. These holes must line up with the screw holes in the card. See Figure 3-2.

2. Plug the card into the top left PDI connector (P8).3. Secure the top of the card to the standoffs with two #6 torx screws and washers.

Figure 3-2. TIC Mounting

IMPORTANT: • The TIC must be mounted in the upper left position of the bay.• The audio riser card must be mounted directly below the TIC.

TIC CARD

STANDOFFS

#6 SCREWS

WASHERS

PDI CONNECTOR (reverse side)

PDI

SCREWRETAINERS

3-10

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

TIC/Motherboard Interconnections

Interconnections Use Figure 3-3 to connect the TIC to a motherboard in another bay.

Figure 3-3. Transponder Cabinet Interconnections

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACEASSY 566-084

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACEASSY 566-084

LED4

SW1

LED1

TB2

PRI

LED2

P1

P3

LED5

TB3

SECRUI

TMPR SW24C INPUT SHLD

4100COMMLOSSRUIG.F.

SEARCH

AUDIO RISER CARD

HARNESS734-008

TI

SPSOR

RPSC

PDI 1

PDI 2

HARNESS734-078

P1

P6

POWER/COMM

Connectors withWhite Wire go to P3

HARNESS 733-525

Connectors withBlue Wire go to P2

PDI Jumpers

P4 and P5 on the PDI must be configured to provide power to the TIC.

--- If there is a Power Supply in Bay 1,

• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 2 and 3.

--- If there is no Power Supply in Bay 1 with the TIC, you must obtain power from Bay 2 or Bay 3.

Option 1

• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 1 and 2.

• Connect one end of Harness 734-008 to Power/Comm plug on the SPS or RPS (P6) (or P2 on XPS) located in Bay 2 or Bay 3. Connect the other end of the harness to P1 in Bay 1.

Option 2

• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 1 and 2.

• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 to Positions 2 and 3 in bay with power supply that will provide power to the TIC in Bay 1.

• Connect one end of Harness 734-008 to P2 or P3 in bay that will provide power to the TIC in Bay 1. Connect the other end of the harness to P1 in Bay 1.

3-11

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

RUI Wiring

Overview The TIC connects to the CPU via the RUI interface. Wire from the RUI interface to each TIC. The wiring may be Class A or Class B.

RUI/RUI+ Specifications

• Output: 24V @ 130mA (RUI), 500 mA (RUI+); 32V maximum (RUI); 25.2V max (RUI+).

• Data Rate: 9,600 bits per second.

• 35.5 ohms maximum wiring impedance; 2500 feet maximum wiring distance.

Wiring Configurations

Class A wiring allows transponder cabinets to communicate with the FACP even in the event of a single open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed from the CPU motherboard to each TIC, and then back again to the CPU motherboard.

Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A.

Figure 3-4 depicts both types of wiring.

Figure Notes:

1. Wire size must be between 18 AWG and 12 AWG.

2. The maximum wiring distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). 3. The maximum cable load is 10,000 feet (3,048 m). 4. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. 5. Do not loop wires under terminals. 6. Shield is optional if the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used.7. Twisted wire is required for RUI. Twisted wire is recommended for improved noise immunity for

RUI+.

Figure 3-4. TIC Wiring to the Host Panel

3-12

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

MINIPLEX Audio Wiring

Overview This section describes the Class A and Class B connections from audio controllers to audio risers, as well as the TIC/riser interconnection. Class A and Class B wiring configurations are shown for both analog and digital controllers and risers.

Analog Interconnections

Figure 3-5 is an illustration of Class A and Class B wiring from the analog audio controller to analog audio risers that are in turn connected to TICs or the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

Figure Notes:1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.

2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG twisted-shielded pair.

3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).

4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum).

5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum).

6. Maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser: 31.

7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Over voltage protector at each entry or exit to the building.

8. Maximum wire distance: 10,000 feet (3,048 meters).

9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.

10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.

11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

Figure 3-5. Analog Audio Interconnections

DASHEDLINES ARE

FOR CLASS AOPERATION

4100-0620BASIC TIC

OR 4100-0625LOCAL

MODE TIC

4100-0620BASIC TIC

OR 4100-0625LOCAL

MODE TIC

4100-0621ANALOGAUDIORISER

(566-242)

4100-1210ANALOGAUDIO

CONTROLLER

TB1RISER 1

1 10

RISER 2

S A A S A A

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

Node 1Miniplex

Transponder

Host Panel

Node 2Control Panel

Node 2Miniplex

Transponder

4100-0623AUDIO RISERCONTROLLER

MODULE

4100-0621ANALOGAUDIORISER

(566-242)

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

4100-0621ANALOGAUDIORISER

(566-242)

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

TB1

RISER 1

1 10

RISER 2

SSEC PRI SEC PRI

S TB1

RISER 1

1 10

RISER 2

SSEC PRI SEC PRI

S TB1

RISER 1

1 1

RISER 2

SSEC PRI SEC PRI

0S

3-13

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

MINIPLEX Audio Wiring (continued)

Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)

Figure 3-6 is an illustration of Style 7 and Style 4 (Class B) digital wiring from the digital audio controller to risers connected to TICs or the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

Figure Notes:1. All wiring is 24 AWG to 18 AWG, twisted-pair.

2. Maximum wire distance: 2,500 feet (762 meters) from digital audio controller primary to the digital audio riser card.

3. Maximum distance between subsequent nodes: 2,500 feet (762 meters)

4. Maximum line distance and capacitance between nodes:

18 AWG : 40 Ohms maximum, 0.055 µF maximum

24 AWG: 135 Ohms maximum, 0.055 µF maximum

5. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building. A maximum of four overvoltage protectors are allowed. Each 2081-9044 adds 6 Ohms and 0.006 µF.

6. Wiring must be free of all grounds.

7. Maximum number of digital interface cards per digital audio riser: 31.

8. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

9. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).

10. In applications where no Digital Audio Controller is connected to the field wiring (such as a synchronized audio application or a non-synchronized application with multiple network microphone s), all DAR interface cards are wired secondary to primary.

Figure 3-6. Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)

HARNESS733-997

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

P3

P2

Host Panel

Transponder 1 Transponder 2

4100-1311 DIGITAL AUDIO

CONTROLLER (566-409, -1028)

4100-0620 BASIC TIC

4100-0625 LOCAL

MODE TIC

4100-0622DIGITAL AUDIORISER

(566-407, -1000)

4100-0622DIGITAL AUDIORISER

+ - S S + - PRI SEC TB2

6 1

- + S - + SEC PRI TB1

1 6

SEC PRI TB11 6

- + S - +

DASHED LINES ARE FOR STYLE 7 OPERATION

PRIMARY DAR

FERRITEBEAD

(required on primary and

secondary DAR)

Loop wires once through the supplied ferrite beads as shown

(566-407, -1000)

3-14

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

4-1

Chapter 4

Networking

Introduction A standalone or MINIPLEX 4100 system becomes a network node when a 4100 Network Interface Card (NIC) or other compatible network card is installed and connected to another network node.

This chapter describes each step of how to how to turn a standalone or MINIPLEX FACP into a network node.

Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages for a detailed description of network cards and the media cards that mount onto them.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card 4-2

Step 1. Configuring Network Cards 4-7

Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC 4-9

Step 3. Mounting Network Cards 4-10

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards 4-11

Network Audio Wiring 4-22

Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug 4-27

4-2

Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card

Overview The Network Interface Card (NIC) is a slave card that uses the standard 4100 serial bus to communicate with the master. The NIC connects FACPs in a network, allowing for communication between each panel via fiber, modem, or twisted shielded pair wire in a Style 7 wiring configuration.

The NIC is designed to be connected in a point-to-point arrangement, so that one wire fault does not cause the entire system to fail. The point-to-point arrangement provides the most secure and fault-tolerant wiring possible.

Two types of media boards can be used with the NIC card.

• The Fiber-Optic Media Card can be used for electrically noisy environments or for connecting externally to other buildings.

• Non-4100ES/4100U only: the Modem Media Card is typically used when a large transmission distance is required.

• The Wired Media Card is used in all other types of applications.

Up to two media boards can be plugged into each NIC. The same NIC can use a combination of two types of media boards (for example, a NIC may have a wired media card connected to port 1 and a fiber-optic media card connected to port 2).

4-3

Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)

Network Module Illustrations

Figure 4-1 depicts the 4100-6014 Network Interface Card.

Figure 4-1. 4100-6014 Network Interface Card

NIC Card LED Indications

The 4100-6014 NIC has the following LEDs:

LED1 (yellow). Illuminates when

• The host 4100 requests it to illuminate• A transmission fails• It is off-line with the 4100 host• It needs to be configuredLED2 (red). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is received at the right port.

LED3 (green). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is transmitted at the right port.

LED4 (red). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is received at the left port.

LED5 (green). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is transmitted at the left port.

DATA TRANSMIT/ RECEIVE LEDs

(LED2 THROUGH LED5)

MEDIA CARD40-PIN

CONNECTORS (P5, P6)

DATA RATE JUMPER PORT (P3)

DATA PROTOCOL

JUMPER PORT (P3)

ADDRESS DIP SWITCH (SW2)

DIAL-UPSERVICEMODEMCONNECTOR (P2)

RESET SWITCH (SW1)

MOTHERBOARD CONNECTOR (P4)

YELLOW LED (LED1)

4-4

Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)

4100 Motherboard Options

The figures below are illustrations of two motherboards apart from the default CPU motherboard that can be used with the 4100 NIC.

• The 565-274 Master Motherboard holds two daughter cards: the 4100 master controller card and the 4100 NIC.

• The 565-275 Class B Motherboard holds the 4100 NIC by itself.

Figure 4-2. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)

Figure 4-3. UT Motherboard without City Connection (565-275)

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (J3)

2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD CONNECTOR (J1)

SYSTEM POWER CONNECTOR (P3)

INTERNAL COMMS CONNECTOR (P2)

UT MASTER CONTROLLER

CONNECTOR (J2)

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (P1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL

BLOCK (TB1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL

BLOCK (TB2)

CITY CONNECT JUMPERS (P4)

P5P6

P7 P8

SYSTEM POWER CONNECTOR (P3)

INTERNAL COMMS CONNECTOR (P2)

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (P1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL

BLOCK (TB2)

2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD CONNECTOR (J1)

4-5

Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)

NIC Card Modules There are three modules that can be plugged into the 4100-6014 NIC:

• 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card (565-261 or 566-376 or 746-109)• 4100-6056 Wired Media Card (565-413)• 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338)Each module is shown below.

Figure 4-4. The 4100/4120-0143/ 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card

Figure 4-5. The 4100/4120-0142 Wired Media Card (565-413)

Continued on next page

FIBER-OPTIC DATA ASSEMBLY FOR565-261 AND 566-376:TRANSMIT (U1)RECEIVE (U2)

FIBER-OPTIC DATA ASSEMBLY FOR746-109:TRANSMIT RECEIVE

40-PIN NETWORK INTERFACECARD CONNECTOR (J1)

JW1 LAUNCH POWERSETTING

RESERVED (TB1)

40-PIN NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CONNECTOR (P1)

R1 P2

4-6

Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)

NIC Card Modules

Figure 4-6. The 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338)

Requirements and Limitations

Refer to Table 4-1 for electrical environmental requirements for the 4100 NIC and media cards.

RJ-11CONNECTOR (P3)

RS-232 CONNECTOR (P1) (USED FOR PHYSICALBRIDGE)

DATA TRANSMISSION JUMPER PORT

(P4)

MODEM TYPE JUMPER PORT

(P5)

STATUS LEDs (LED1, LED2)

40-PIN NETWORK INTERFACE CARD CONNECTOR (J1)

Table 4-1. Electrical and Environmental Specifications

Electrical Specifications

Network Interface Card Startup, no media cards: 8 VDC @ 110 mA

565-516 Nominal, no media cards: 20 to 32 VDC @ 0 mA

Network Interface Card 566-793

Nominal, no media cards: 20 to 32 VDC @ 46 mA

Modem Media Card 5 VDC @ 180 mA max.

Fiber Using 24 VDC power supply: 20 VDC @ 140 mA max.

Media Card Using 5 V power supply (GCC/NPU): 5 VDC @ 130 mA max.

Wired Media Card 4.75 to 5.25 VDC @ 170 mA max.

Environmental Specifications (All Modules)

Operating Temperature 32o F to 120 oF (0oC× to 49oC)

Humidity 10% to 93% relative humidity at 90 oF (32 oC)

4-7

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 1. Configuring Network Cards

Overview The NIC card, along with the each media card, all have jumpers that must be set as shown below.

Motherboard Jumper Settings

NIC-compatible jumper settings on CPU motherboards depend on which motherboards are used.

Motherboard 565-274 (Figure 4-2):

• JW1 and JW2 must be installed. • Jumper plugs P5-P8 must not be installed.

Motherboard 566-227 (Figure 4-2):

P6: Port 1 settings.

P5: Port 2 settings.

• P6/P5 position 1 – 2: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).• P6/P5 position 2 – 3: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.

RUI+ Master Motherboard 566-938 (for figure see Chapter 2):

P10: Port 1 settings.

P11: Port 2 settings.

• P10/P11 position 1 – 2: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).• P10/P11 position 2 – 3: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.

NIC Card Address Setting

Use SW2 to set the NIC card address. Refer to Appendix A for the address table.

NIC Card Jumper Settings

There are two shunt jumper ports on the NIC card that need to be set: P3 and P4. (Figure 4-1)

P3: Determines the NIC data transmission rate, 57.6 kbits/second or 9600 bits/second.

• Position 1 – 2 (the right two pins) or no pins jumpered: 57.6 kbits/second. • Position 2 – 3 (the left two pins): 9600 bits/second.

P4: Determines the data protocol, 8-bit or 9-bit, that the NIC card is using.

• Position 1 – 2 (the right two pins) or no pins jumpered: 9-bit.• Position 2 – 3 (the left two pins): 8-bit.

All settings are labeled on the card.

Wired Media Card Jumper Settings

P2: Tells the system which wire type is to be used. (Figure 4-5)

Positions 1 – 2, 5 – 6, and 7 – 8: 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair wiring.

Remove all jumpers to specify 24 AWG twisted pair telephone cable wiring.

IMPORTANT: When using the wired media card, the Earth fault detection is performed on the left port only. Remove R1

(1 Ohm resistor) from the media card on the right port.

4-8

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 1. Configuring Network Cards (continued)

Modem Media Card Jumper Settings

Non-4100ES/4100U only. P4 and P5 on the modem media card tell the system how the card is being used. (Figure 4-6):

P4: Sets the card up as a network media card or a standalone modem.

• Position 1 – 2 (required): Sets the card up as a network media card, a service modem, or a physical bridge.

• Position 2 – 3: Sets the card up as a stand-alone modem. P5: Specifies which connector will be used for data transmission.

• Position 1 – 2: For modem media board or stand-alone modem. Specifies that the transmission data comes from the 40-pin connector (J1).

• Position 2 – 3: For service modem or physical bridge. Specifies that the transmission data comes from the 10-pin RS-232 connector (P1).

Fiber Media Jumper Settings (746-109 only)

JW1 is used to adjust the link power budget. If communication problems are encountered, make sure that the fiber connections comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B-3 industry standards. The low power setting is preferred for all 62.5um fiber links less than 11dB and 50um fiber links less than 6.6.dB.

Link Power Budget Settings (62.5um fiber/50um fiber):Low 11dB / 6.6 dBMed 16 dB /11.6 dBHigh 20.4dB / 17 dB

4-9

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC

Overview The 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC) uses media cards to connect to other NICs. This section describes how the media cards are mounted onto NICs.

Media Card Mounting

NICs connect to each other via the three types of media cards. The types of media cards in the right and left ports are determined by the type of wiring that is being used across cards.

Connect P1 on the wired media card, or J1 on the modem or fiber media cards, to P5 (the left port) on the NIC.

To connect a second media card to the same NIC, connect it as described above, but use P6 (the right port) on the NIC. Note that any two types of media cards can be connected to the same NIC.

Figure 4-7. Media Card Mounting

MEDIA CARDS

4100-6014 NETWORK INTERFACE CARD

40-PINCONNECTION (MEDIA CARD

P1 OR J1 TO NIC P5)

40-PINCONNECTION (MEDIA CARD P1 OR J1 TO NIC P6)

STANDOFFS FIT INTO HOLES

4-10

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 3. Mounting Network Cards

Daughter Card Installing

The 4100 NIC daughter card, shown in Figure 4-8, inserts into motherboards as follows:

• If the 565-274 Master Motherboard is being used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J1.

• If the 566-227 Master Motherboard or 565-275 Motherboard is used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J2.

• If the 566-938 RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard is used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into connector J6.

Figure 4-8. Installing the Daughter Card

4-11

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards

Overview The nodes in the network now have to be wired together, so that the NIC in one host panel connects to the NIC in the next panel. This section contains guidelines and instructions for NIC wiring.

Wiring Guidelines Refer to the following guidelines whenever field wiring the NICs.

• Network nodes must be wired right to left port, regardless of the media type selected.• Style 7 protection is achieved by wiring the nodes in a loop fashion. A single fault (except

an Earth fault) will cause the network to reconfigure for degraded Style 7 (Style 4) operation. A second fault (except an Earth fault) will result in the network dividing into two separate networks.

• Style 4 is achieved by wiring the nodes in a linear fashion. Style 4 networks are not fault-tolerant and a single fault (except an Earth fault) will result in the network dividing into two separate networks.

• Earth fault detection is performed on the left port only. When a network Earth fault occurs, the trouble is only reported on the node whose left port is connected to the span.

• All 18 AWG wiring used with 4100-6056 Wired Media Cards must be twisted-shielded pair. All 24 AWG (telephone cable) used with 4100-6056 must be twisted pair. When shielded cable is used, the shield must be terminated to chassis Earth on the left port only.

• It is permissible to use mixed media in a network. For example, some spans may be “wired media” while others are optical fiber or telephone modem.

• Each NIC has a jumper for selecting between network data rates of 57.6 kbps and • 9.6 kbps. All cards in the network must be set for the same rate. (When modem media or

physical bridging is used, the data rate must be set for 9.6 kbps). • Each NIC has a jumper for selecting between 8- and 9-bit network protocols. All cards in

the network must be set for the same network protocol. (When modem media or physical bridging is used, the protocol must be set for 8-bit).

• All network wiring except the shield is supervised and power limited.• When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One

overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.

Continued on next page

4-12

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Wiring Guidelines A 655-158 Transient Suppressor (ordered as part of 748-599) is required for each

modem-to-telephone line connection.

Figure 4-9. The Transient Suppressor

Wiring Distances Maximum wiring distances are shown in Table 4-2.

Note: • 18 AWG fire-rated twisted, shielded pair must not exceed 58 pF per foot and be less than or equal to

6.385 Ohms per 1,000 feet (305 m).• 24 AWG twisted, unshielded telephone cable must not exceed 22 pF per foot and be less than or equal

to 25.6 Ohms per 1,000 feet (305 m).

Related Documentation

Refer to the 900-242 Field Wiring Specifications for additional NIC wiring information.

8

5

Grn

Telephone Line

1

4

7

6

2

3

Transient Suppressor Assembly (655-158) added to RJ-31x as shown. If connecting to a terminal block, cut off one end of the cable. Strip back the cable to connect the two center wires, normally red and green, to the red and green wires in the block.

Table 4-2. Wiring Distances

Media Type Size Data Rate Max Distance

Wired24 AWG

57.6 kbps 7,000 ft (2,134 m)

9.6 kbps 12,000 ft (3,658 m)

18 AWG57.6 kbps 10,000 ft (3,048 m)

9.6 kbps 17,000 ft (5,182 m)

Optical Fiber 50/125 um 57.6 or 9.6 kbps 10,000 ft (3,048 m)

62.5/125 um 57.6 or 9.6 kbps 15,000 ft (4,572 m)

Modem (Physical Bridge) 24 AWG (dry) 9.6 kbps 15,000 ft (4,572 m)

RS-23218 AWG

57.6 kbps 50 ft (15 m)

9.6 kbps 300 ft (91 m)

4-13

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Fiber-Optic Wiring

Connectors U1 (transmitter) and U2 (receiver) on the 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card are used to connect 4100-6014 NICs across parts of a network.

Note: • ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.• Fiber backbone components must meet or exceed standard EIA/TIA 568-B (Electronic Industries

Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association) for maximum power losses; single-mode fiber is preferred; attenuation should be measured at 1310 nm.

Figure 4-10 shows how two network nodes are connected via fiber-optic cable.

Figure 4-10. Fiber Wiring

Fiber Optic Connection Types

Dual Fiber Optic Cable Connections. The standard fiber optic connection between network nodes uses two fiber optic cables, one for transmit, and the other for receive. This connection allows for optimum communications distance.

The available communications distance is determined by the properties of the specific fiber cable used. Distances can be determined using the information and examples shown in

Table 4-3.

Single Fiber Optic Cable Connections. For applications where a single fiber cable is available, or where use of a single cable is desired, using a model 4190 9010 Bi-Directional Coupler at each node combines the separate transmit and receive signals into a single path (refer to the requirements list).

This connection allows use of a single fiber cable, but it does reduce communications distance as indicated in the information and examples shown in Table 4-4.

U1 U2 U1 U2 U1 U2 U1 U2

FIBER MEDIA CARD

4100-6014 NETWORK

INTERFACE CARD

Fiber-Optic Cable

4-14

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

4190-9010 Coupler Requirements

The 4190-9010 Coupler (271-012) is used with the 565-261 Fiber Optic Media Board (revision “C” or higher), the 566-376 or the 746-109. Two 4190-9010 Bi-Directional Couplers are required per connection, one at each node.

The 4190-9010 is equipped with type ST connectors. To make type ST to type ST connections, an ST to ST coupler, by others, is required. ST to ST Couplers are available from:

Black Box, part number FO200

Fiber Instrument Sales, part number F1-8101

Newark Electronics, part number 95F2097

(or the equivalent)

Notes for Table 4-3 and Table 4-4:

1. Cable specifications are for 50 or 62.5 micron core with 125 micron cladding, multi-mode graded index fiber. Wavelength = 850 nm.

2. MIFL = Maximum Individual Fiber Loss. Numbers shown are for example reference only, refer to specific cable for exact specification.

3. Maximum cable length is determined by distance listed or by reaching budget value, which-ever is shorter. Maximum distances listed for dual fiber cable are shorter than would be calculated. Budget using 4190-9010 Bi-Directional Coupler is the same with either size cable because the coupler input cables are 62.5/125 fiber allowing launch power to be the same.

Continued on next page

Table 4-3. Dual Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples

Fiber Type 1* MIFL 2Power Margin Distance 3 Budget 3

50/125numericalaperture = 0.2

4 dB/km 4 dB 10,000 ft (3.05 km)

17 dB

3 dB/km 3 dB 15,000 ft (4.57 km)

62.5/125numericalaperture = 0.275

4 dB/km 4 dB 13,000 ft (3.96 km)

20.4 dB

3.75 dB/km 3 dB 15,000 ft (4.57 km)

*See notes at bottom of page.

Table 4-4. Single Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples*

Fiber Type 1 MIFL 2 Power Margin Distance 3 Budget 3

4190-9010 Coupler Loss

ST to ST Coupler Loss

50/125 numerical numerical = 0.2

3 dB/km

2 dB

7,650 ft(2.33 km)

21.4 dB 9.4 dB

3 dB

62.5/125 numerical aperture = 0.275

3.2 dB/km 8,200 ft (2.5 km)

2 dB

*Examples made using 4190 9010 Bi-Directional Couplers

4-15

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

4190-9010 Coupler Requirements

Figure 4-11 shows coupler wiring.

Figure 4-11. Coupler Wiring

Wiring with the Wired Media Card

Refer to the guidelines and figures in this topic to use wired media cards.

• When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot be used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.

• The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.

• When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.

Continued on next page

FD4-848-1

IMPORTANT: TB1 on the wired media card must not be used when it is connected to the 4100-6014 NIC.

4-16

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Wiring with the Wired Media Card

Table 4-5, lists the 4100ES master motherboard connections for the wired media card.

Figure 4-12, shows how two CPU motherboards with wired media network cards connect to each other in the 4100ES.

Figure 4-12. Wired Media Interconnections Between 4100ES Motherboards

Table 4-5. CPU Motherboard Wired Media Connections

566-227 CPU Master Motherboard RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Motherboard Port for Media Card

Connected to P5

Wired Media Card Connection(Left Port)

Motherboard Port for Media Card Connected

to P5

Wired Media Card Connection(Left Port)

TB1

TB1-4 0 V

TB2

TB2-4 0 V

TB1-5 Earth ground TB2-5 Earth ground

TB1-6 INV (-) TB2-6 INV (-)

TB1-7 None TB2-7 None

TB1-8 NONINV (+) TB2-8 NONINV (+)

Motherboard Port for Media Card Connected to P6

Wired Media Card Connection (Right

Port)

Motherboard Port for Media Card Connected to P6

Wired Media Card Connection (Right

Port)

TB3

TB3-1 NONINV (+)

TB3

TB3-1 NONINV (+)

TB3-2 Reserved TB3-2 Reserved

TB3-3 INV (-) TB3-3 INV (-)

TB3-4 Earth ground TB3-4 Earth ground

TB3-5 0 V TB3-5 0 V

18 AWG5151

TB3

R+ R-

8 TB1 1

L+ L-

4-17

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Modem Guidelines

Review the following guidelines before wiring a network with modem media boards.

• Modem media wiring for NICs applies to non-4100ES/4100U systems only. • Phone Line Classification consists of the following:

- Private leased line for analog data communications- No dial tone- Full duplex operation- No conditioning required- No signaling required- Two-wire line interface- RJ-11 modular jack

• If a four-wire circuit is required, the line must include a data station termination (DST) device to provide the two-wire interface required by the 4120 network modem. The DST device should be located as close to the FACP as possible to minimize dry line signal losses.

• The modem is capable of full duplex V.32bis analog data communications. The transmit signal level is 10 dbm.

• Telecommunications device: Xecom Model XE1414 or XE1414C V.32bis Two-Wire Analog Modem

• Modem FCC Registration Number: DWEUSA-75322-FA-E (565-279); DWEUSA-35610-M5-E (566-338)

Modem Wiring

The Modem Media Card uses RJ-11 connectors to connect 4100-6014 NIC Assemblies across parts of a network.

Use the RJ-11 connector (P2) to connect nodes that use the modem media card. Do not use connector P1 (P1 is reserved for when the daughter card is used as a physical bridge). Leased lines must be analog, full-duplex, private line (no dial tone), with a two-wire RJ-11 interface. Style 4 requires one circuit; Style 7 requires two circuits.

Figure 4-13. Modem Wiring

IMPORTANT: Modem media wiring for NICs applies to non-4100ES/4100U systems only.

P3 P3 P3 P3

MODEM MEDIA CARD

4100-6014 NETWORK

INTERFACE CARD

Standard TELCO Cable

4-18

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Wiring Illustrations

The following figures show how to wire the NIC. The illustrations use the 565-274 and 565-275 motherboards only. If you are using the 4100ES motherboard, refer to Figure 4-14 along with the figures below.

Wired Media Style 7 Wiring

Figure 4-14. Wired Media, Style 7 Wiring

Notes:

1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-242 for 4100ES.

2. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot be used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.

3. The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.

4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.

5. Each “wired” media cable requires two ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to installation instructions 574-041 for proper bead mounting.

SEE NOTE 3

SEE NOTE 5

SEE NOTE 3

OR566-826

OR566-825

4-19

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Fiber Optic Style 7 Wiring

Figure 4-15. Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring

FD4-848-2

Notes:

1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-242 for 4100ES. For specific information about fiber optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial.

2. The maximum distance between nodes when using the fiber communication path is dependent upon the fiber’s multimode graded index: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) for 50/125 fiber; 15,000 feet (4,572 m) for 62.5/125 fiber. The maximum cable O.D. is 0.118 (3 mm). Reference document 900-143 for other fiber sizes.

3. ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.

4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.

5. Cable clamps supplied with 748-531 are used to secure the fiber cable.

OV2L-L+EARTHEARTHOV1R-R+

TB2

NETWORKINTERFACEASSY565-4110R566-826

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

XMT

XMT

XMT

RCV

RCV

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

XMT RCV

RCV

LEFT PORT

RIGHT PORT

TB1

PORTLEFT RIGHT

NETWORK INTERFACE(DAUGHTER CARD)ASSY 565-409 OR566-793

4100

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

XMT RCVFIBEROPTIONASSY*

XMT RCV

PORTLEFT RIGHT

NETWORK INTERFACE(DAUGHTER CARD)ASSY 565-409 OR566-793

4100

4020

OV2L-L+EARTHEARTHOV1R-R+

TB2

NETWORKINTERFACEASSY565-4320R566-825

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

XMT

XMT

RCV

RCV

LEFT PORT

RIGHT PORT

TB1

4002

TB1

TB2

MOTHERBOARD ASSY 565-275

8

8

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1L-

L+

+R

-R

IV0

OV2

TB1

TB2

MOTHERBOARD ASSY 565-274

8

8

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1L-

L+

+R

-R

IV0

OV2

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

7

* FIBER OPTION ASSY565-261, 566-376, or 746-109 CAN BE USED

SEE NOTE 5

SEE NOTE 5

SEE NOTE 5

4-20

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Wired Media and Fiber Optic Style 7 Wiring

Figure 4-16. Wired Media and Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring

FD4-848-3

Notes:

1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-242 for 4100ES. For specific information about fiber optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial.

2. The maximum distance between nodes when using the fiber communication path is dependent upon the fiber’s multimode graded index: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) for 50/125 fiber; 15,000 feet (4,572 m) for 62.5/125 fiber. The maximum cable O.D. is 0.118 (3 mm). Reference document 900-143 for other fiber sizes.

3. ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.

4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.

5. Cable clamps supplied with 748-531 are used to secure the fiber cable.

6. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot be used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown.

7. The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.

8. Each “wired” media cable requires two ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to installation instructions 574-041 for proper bead mounting.

9. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.

SEE NOTE 5

SEE NOTE 6 SEE NOTES 7 and 8

SEENOTES 7

and 8

OV2L-L+EARTHEARTHOV1R-R+

TB2

NETWORKINTERFACEASSY565-4110R566-826

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

XMT

RCV

LEFTPORT

RIGHT PORT

TB1

XMT

4020

OV2L-L+EARTHEARTHOV1R-R+

TB2

NETWORKINTERFACEASSY565-4320R566-825

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

XMT

RCV

LEFT PORT

RIGHTPORT

TB1

4002

* FIBER OPTION ASSY565-261, 566-376, or 746-109 CAN BE USED

“WIRED”MEDIAOPTIONASSY565-413

“WIRED”MEDIAOPTIONASSY565-413

“WIRED”MEDIAOPTIONASSY565-413

“WIRED”MEDIAOPTIONASSY565-413

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

RCV

PORTLEFT RIGHT

NETWORK INTERFACE(DAUGHTER CARD)ASSY 565-409 OR566-793

TB1

TB2

MOTHERBOARD ASSY 565-274

8

8

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2 1

L-

+R

-R

IV0

OV2

12 13 14 15 16

FIBEROPTIONASSY*

XMT RCV

PORTLEFT RIGHT

NETWORK INTERFACE(DAUGHTER CARD)ASSY 565-409 OR566-793

4100

TB1

TB2

MOTHERBOARD ASSY 565-275

8

8

7

7

6

6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1L-

L+

L+

+R

-R

IV0

OV2

9 10 111 2

4-21

Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)

Figure Notes:1. All wiring is 24 AWG twisted pair.2. Connections between nodes can be made using unpowered (“dry”) copper wires or through powered (“wet”) leased lines.

3. Maximum cable distance between nodes when using short haul is 24 AWG twisted pair is 15,000 feet (4,572 m).4. Long haul telephone circuits must be private leased lines for analog data, point-to-point, full duplex, two-wire line interface with RJ-11

termination (where no line conditioning or signaling are required).5. Modem media board power (565-279/566-338): 180 mA. Maximum at 5 +/- 0.25 VDC.6. Modem media boards operate only at 9600 bps, with an 8-bit protocol.7. Refer to general wiring precautions in this document, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-242 for

4100ES. Refer to Test Specification 576-241 for instructions on how to communicate with the modem.8. When using a service modem, connect to the 565-516 or 566-793 board using Cable 733-808 in shipping group 740-850. Use Cable

171-095 to connect the modem to a phone jack and/or a telephone termination block. Cut off one end of Cable 171-095 if connecting to a telephone termination block. Strip back the cable to connect the two center wires to the red and green wires in the block. Refer to Test Specification 576-241 for instructions on how to communicate with the modem. Place jumpers across 1-2 of P4 and 2-3 of P5.

9. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.

10. Modem media assemblies have part number 565-279 or 566-338.11. A network can support can support up to 98 physical bridge nodes. Only four modems are permitted per network.

Figure 4-17. Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)

IMPORTANT: Figure 4-17 applies only to non-4100ES/4100U systems.

0V 2L -L +EARTH NETWORK

INTERFACEASSY

565-518

4020

MODEMMEDIAASSY

LEFT PORTEARTH0V 1R -R +TB2

MODEMMEDIAASSY

RIGHT PORT

TB1

0V 2L -L +EARTH NETWORK

INTERFACEASSY

565-518

4020

MODEMMEDIAASSY

LEFT PORTEARTH0V 1R -R +TB2

"WIRED"MEDIA ASSY565-413

"WIRED"MEDIAASSY565-413

MODEMMEDIAASSY

MOTHERBOARDASSY565-275

8

MODEMMEDIAASSY

PHONE JACKORTELEPHONETERMINATIONBLOCK

4100

PORTLEFT RIGHT

NETWORK INTERFACEASSY 565-516

RIGHT PORT

TB1

7 6 5 4

+R

-R

TB1

1V0

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5L+

L-

TB2

0V2

6 7 8

"WIRED"MEDIAASSY565-413

"WIRED"MEDIAASSY565-413

MOTHERBOARDASSY565-274

8

4100

PORTLEFT RIGHT

NETWORK INTERFACEASSY 565-516

7 6 5 4

+R

-R

TB1

1V0

3 2 1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 161 2 3 4 5 6 7 8L+

L-

TB2

0V2

OR566-826

OR566-826

OR 566-793

OR 566-793

4-22

Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring

Head-End Audio Network Configuration

A “Head End” audio network usually contains one node with an audio controller module

(4100-1210 Analog Controller Board or 4100-1211 [or -1311] Digital Controller Board), and may contain local analog or digital amplifiers. Some configurations may have an audio controller module located in a non-head end node; for example, an application with backup local audio in a non-head end node or an application with distributed microphones.

Typically, the other nodes only contain amplifiers, the audio riser interface (4100-0621 Analog Audio Riser or 4100-0622 Digital Audio Riser), the 4100-0623 and the 4100-1341 Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

The 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module supports audio interconnections when connected to 4100-0621 Analog Audio Risers or 4100-0622 Digital Audio Risers. It is a version of the Basic TIC that doesn’t have an RUI input. It communicates via internal slave communications and is used to control audio riser interface modules in network nodes that are stand-alone fire alarm control panels.

Locations on the Network Audio Riser Controller Module

Figure 4-18 shows the DIP switch, LED, and connector locations on the 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

Figure 4-18. Network Audio Riser Controller Module

LED4

SW1

LED1

TB2

PRI

LED2

P1

P3

LED5

TB3

SECRUI

TMPR SW24C INPUT SHLD

4100COMMLOSSRUIG.F.

SEARCH

AUDIO RISER CARD

SW1. Baud rate/device address

DIP switch (see Appendix A)

LED1. Illuminates to indicate

communication loss with the CPU

P3. Audio riser connector

4-23

Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring (continued)

Card Specifications

Table 4-6 lists the specifications for the 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module.

Table 4-6. Network Audio Riser Controller Specifications

Electrical Specifications

Input voltage 18-33 VDC

Input Current 25 mA for Network Audio Riser Controller connected to a network node

Environmental Specifications

Operating Temperature 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)

Humidity 10% to 93% relative humidity at 90 oF (32oC)

4-24

Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring (continued)

Analog Interconnections

Figure 4-19 is an illustration of Class A and Class B wiring from the analog audio controller to risers connected to the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.Note: Old legacy 0566-218 Analog Audio Controller was replaced due to component obsolescence. The

replacement board is the 0566-1011 Analog Audio Controller. It is functionally equivalent to the legacy board.

Figure Notes:1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG, twisted-shielded pair.

3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).

4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum).

5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum).

6. The maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser is 31.

7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building.

8. The maximum wire distance is10,000 feet (3,048 meters).

9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.

10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.

11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

Figure 4-19. Analog Audio Interconnections

DASHEDLINES ARE

FOR CLASS AOPERATION

4100-0621ANALOGAUDIORISER

(566-242)

4100-1210ANALOGAUDIO

CONTROLLER(566-218, -1011)

TB1RISER 1

1 10

RISER 2

S A A S A A

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

Node 1

Node 1Host Panel

Node 2 Node 3

4100-0623AUDIO RISERCONTROLLER

MODULE

4100-0623AUDIO RISERCONTROLLER

MODULE

4100-0623AUDIO RISERCONTROLLER

MODULE

4100-0621ANALOGAUDIORISER

(566-242)

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

4100-0621ANALOGAUDIORISER

(566-242)

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

TB1

RISER 1

1 10

RISER 2

SSEC PRI SEC PRI

S TB1

RISER 1

1 10

RISER 2

SSEC PRI SEC PRI

S TB1

RISER 1

1 10

RISER 2

SSEC PRI SEC PRI

S

4-25

Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring (continued)

Digital Interconnections for the 4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller

Figure 4-20 is an illustration of Style 7 and Style 4 (Class B) digital wiring from the digital audio controller to risers connected to the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.Note: Old legacy 0566-409 Digital Audio Controller, 0566-407 DARIC, and 0566-833 MCC DARIC boards

were replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement boards are the 0566-1028 Digital Audio Controller, 0566-1000 DARIC, and 0566-1001 MCC DARIC. They are functionally equivalent to the legacy boards.

Figure Notes:1. All wiring is 24 AWG to 18 AWG , twisted-pair.2. Maximum wire distance: 2,500 feet (762 meters) from digital audio controller primary to the digital audio riser card.

3. Maximum distance between subsequent nodes: 2,500 feet (762 meters).

4. Maximum line distance and capacitance between nodes:

18 AWG: 40 Ohms maximum , 0.05 uF maximum 24 AWG: 135 Ohms maximum, 0.055 uF maximum

5. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building. A maximum of four overvoltage protectors are allowed. Each 2081-9044 adds 6 Ohms and 0.006 uF.

6. Wiring must be free of all grounds.

7. Maximum number of digital interface cards per digital audio riser: 31.

8. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

9. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).

10. In applications where no Digital Audio Controller is connected to the field wiring (such as a synchronized audio application or a non-synchronized application with multiple network microphone s), all DAR interface cards are wired secondary to primary.

Figure 4-20. Digital Audio Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)

NODE N(STYLE 4

ONLY)

NODE P(STYLE 4

ONLY)

DASHEDLINES ARE

FOR STYLE 7OPERATION

(required on primaryand secondary DAR)

Loop wires oncethrough the supplied

ferrite beads as shown

DAR TOPRIMARY

INPUT

DAR TOPRIMARY

INPUT

4100-0622DIGITALAUDIORISER

(566-407, -1000)

4100-1311DIGITALAUDIO

CONTROLLER(566-409, -1028)

TB3

TB2

TB3 TB3

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2Ferrite Bead

Host Panel

NODE Q(STYLE 4

ONLY)

NODE R(STYLE 4

ONLY)

4100-0622DIGITALAUDIORISER

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

4100-0622DIGITALAUDIORISER

HARNESS733-997

P3

P2

DAR TOPRIMARY

INPUTNode 1 Node 2 Node 3

4100-0623AUDIO RISERCONTROLLER

MODULE

4100-0623AUDIO RISERCONTROLLER

MODULE

4100-0623AUDIO RISERCONTROLLER

MODULE

(566-407, -1000) (566-407, -1000)

4-26

Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring (continued)

Distributed Microphone Interconnections

A Distributed Microphone is used between audio nodes in a network system where each node has its own local audio (its own Digital Audio Controller) but needs to be able to play the microphone channel from a separate node’s Digital Audio Controller.

For a distributed microphone application, the 4100-0622 Digital Riser Interface (566-407, -1000) has a single digital to analog converter that can be set to convert any single channel of the Digital Audio Riser (DAR) stream to analog. This analog output is connected to a second Digital Audio Controller’s remote microphone input or to the microphone input of a 4100-1240 Input Option Card (566-037). DIP switches configure the channel selection and density.

Figure 4-21 is an illustration of the distributed microphone application wiring. Refer to the Switches and Indicators section for switch settings to configure the distributed microphone channel output.

Reference for MCC DARIC Installation

For information of the installation of Multiple Digital Command Centre (MCC) Digital Audio Riser Input Option Cards (DARICs) refer to the latest revision of document 574-844.

Figure Notes:1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W

resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.

2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG, twisted-shielded pair.

3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).

4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum)

5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum)

6. Maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser: 31.

7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building.

8. Maximum wire distance: 10,000 feet (3,048 meters).

9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.

10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.

11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

Figure 4-21. Distributed Microphone Interconnections

(566-409, -1028)

(566-407, -1000)

(566-409, -1028)

Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug

Overview A Digital Audio Riser Termination Plug (734-183) is provided with every Digital Audio Controller or Digital Audio Riser Module. You must use this termination plug to properly terminate the Digital Audio Signal on the PDI.

Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug

To properly terminate the Digital Audio Signal on the PDI, you must install the termination plug into P7 of the Node’s last bay that has Digital Audio. The Digital Audio Controller should be the first item and the Digital Audio Termination Plug the last item in the Digital Audio PDI Bay-to-Bay wiring. See Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22. Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug

Place the Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug into P7 of the Node’s last bay with Digital Audio.

5-1

Chapter 5

The System Power Supply (SPS)

Introduction This chapter describes how the system power supply (SPS) is installed and configured by the factory. Check the information in this chapter to make sure the SPS is installed correctly.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

SPS Specifications 5-2

SPS Configuration 5-4

SPS LED Indications 5-5

Troubleshooting 5-6

5-2

Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

SPS Specifications

Input/Output/Battery Specifications

Table 5-1 summarizes the specifications for the SPS.

Note: • The battery circuit is supervised.• When it is necessary to activate large numbers of output devices on IDNet peripherals (such as piezo

sounders), the output voltage is increased to 35V to provide sufficient voltage at the end of line to activate the piezo. The higher voltage state is an alarm condition for the purpose of standby battery calculation. The 30V output is the normal condition and is used to prolong battery standby. The system CPU will activate the boost feature when 10 LED, Piezo or other outputs are activated.

• AC power must be provided to the 4100ES from a dedicated AC branch circuit. The AC input is supervised.

• 220/230/240 VAC SPS only: The service branch circuit breaker should be sized to handle at least 150 percent of the total required by all of the power supplies in the system. If more than a 13 A branch circuit is required then multiple dedicated branch circuits should be used instead.

• The 4100ES is a configurable system. Each system must be evaluated for battery standby requirements based upon the configuration. 4100ES systems can be configured with multiple sets of batteries if necessary. A basic 4100ES system can achieve 24 hours standby with 12.7 Ah batteries. For UL Listed systems, up to 110 Ah batteries may be used. For ULC Listed systems, up to 50 Ah batteries may be used. Refer to the Sales Engineering battery calculation tool for assistance.

Table 5-1. Input and Output Specifications

AC Input Specifications

SPS in Standard U.S./Canada FACP or 4100-5111/5112 SPS

4 A Maximum120 VAC @ 60 Hz, nominal

SPS in Standard International FACP or 4100-5113 SPS

2 A Maximum220/230/240 VAC @ 50 or 60 Hz

DC Output Specifications

All SPSs Minimum: 19.9 VDC (Special Applications)Maximum: 31.1 VDCRipple: 2 VDC p-p @ full load (9 A)

SPS IDNet Output (see note) 30 V or 35 V @ 1/2A; 36.75V maximum; 3,333 bits per second

Battery Charger Specifications

Input Voltage Range 21-33 VDC

Output Float Voltage 27.4 VDC ±500 mV @ 20oC, temperature

compensated at -24mV to -36mV/×C (32oF to

120oF or 0oC to 49oC)

High Voltage Output 29.1 V @ 3.3 A

Output Current Limit 1.4 A (For 6.2 - 18 Ah battery)3.3 A (Default; for 18-50 Ah battery- Canadian; for 18-110 Ah battery - U.S.)

5-3

Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

SPS Specifications (continued)

SPS Current Consumption

Table 5-2 summarizes battery standby capabilities for the SPS. Voltage assumed is 24 VDC, which is the rated battery voltage for lead-acid type batteries.

Note: • Additional standby conditions: Trouble relay activated, power trouble LED on, IDNet LED on, battery

charger off, auxiliary power load = 0 mA• Additional alarm conditions: Trouble relay activated, power trouble LED on, IDNet LED on, battery

charger off, auxiliary power load = 0 mA, NAC alarm load = 0 mA, IDNet = 35 V

The Notification Appliance Circuits on the SPS are rated for Special Application and for Regulated 24 VDC operation per UL864, 9th Edition.

When used with the Notification Appliances listed in Table I (Appendix I) or Table J (Appendix J), each NAC is rated for 3A, and total SPS capacity is rated at 9A. This rating is the UL864 Special Application rating. Appliances listed in Table I or Table J are synchronized per UL864, between all NACs on the SPS, and any NACs on a SPS, RPS, or XPS within the same 4100ES system.

For use with Notification Appliances not listed in Table I or Table J, each circuit is rated for 2A maximum, with a total Notification Appliance load of 4A per SPS. This rating is the UL 864 Regulated 24 VDC rating. Synchronization of strobes and other appliances requires use of the associated, Listed, compatible Synchronization Module. Consult supplier of Notification Appliances for synchronization limits and details.

Simplex Appliances (Table I) May not be mixed with Wheelock Appliances (Table J) on a single power supply. A 4100ES system with mix of appliances from Table I and Table J will not meet the UL 864 9th Edition requirement for Visual synchronization (10 milliseconds) between power supplies. Appliances listed in Table I will be consistently out of visual sync with appliances in Table J by about 30 milliseconds. Appliances listed Table I will be notably out of audible sync with appliances in Table J by a consistent (Wheelock leading by 1/2 second). In order to meet the requirements for visual and audible sync system wide, all appliances in the system must be exclusively from either Table I or Table J.

Non-pulsing, linear-type Notification Appliances, such as horns or bells may be used up to the full rating (3A / NAC, 9A total for the SPS).

Table 5-2. SPS Current Specifications

Standby Conditions Current

• No alarms (NACs normal)• IDNet LED ON, no IDNet devices connected

175 mA

Add to above for each additional set of 50 IDNet devices in standby, with IDNet at 30 V

40 mA

Total current for fully loaded IDNet channel (250 devices) in standby 375 mA

Alarm Conditions Current

• 3 NACs ON• IDNet LED ON, no IDNet devices connected

185 mA

Add to above for each set of 50 IDNet devices in alarm, 20 LEDs ON 80 mA

Add to above for each set of 50 IDNet devices in alarm, LEDs OFF 50 mA

Total current for a fully loaded IDNet channel (250 devices) in alarm, 20 LEDs ON 475 mA

5-4

Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

SPS Configuration

Overview This section contains information about SPS jumpers and DIP switches. Refer to Chapter 4 of this document for information on setting the jumpers.

Jumper Settings P1: Earth connect jumper. Note that the P1 location is clearly designated on the PCB silk screen.

• Position 1 – 2: Enables Earth fault monitoring.

• Position 2 – 3: Disables Earth fault monitoring.

Only one power module should be set for earth fault monitoring for each location within a system. Normally, the SPS in the CPU bay is set to monitor for earth faults. If there is a second SPS connected to the same set of batteries, that SPS should have earth fault monitoring disabled. Other power modules that can be set to monitor earth fault conditions are TPS, RPS and XBC. When located under common 0V with a TPS, the TPS should be set to monitor earth faults, and other co-located power modules should be set to disable earth fault monitoring.

P2: If the SPS IDNet outputs are being used, you may change P2 to configure the IDNet shield connection. Note that the P2 pin 1 location is towards P3.

• Position 1 – 2: Connects the shield to 0 V (default).

• Position 2 – 3: Connects the shield to earth ground.

P3: City Card and Relay Card operation. Note that the P3 pin 1 location is towards P2.

• Position 1-2: Install in position 1-2 only if a relay card 4100-6033 is installed and has relay 3 programmed for operation other than "Trouble"

• Position 2-3: (default) For City Card operation and for use with 4100-6033 if relay 3 is programmed for "activate on trouble" operation

Setting the Device Address

Refer to Appendix A to set the device address for the SPS with DIP switch SW1.

5-5

Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

SPS LED Indications

LEDs The SPS has the following LEDs:LED1 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 1 is ON or in Trouble.LED2 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 2 is ON or in Trouble.LED3 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 3 is ON or in Trouble.LED4 (yellow). Illuminates to indicate a communications loss with the system CPU; normally off. If this LED is blinking, try re-loading the software to FLASH.LED5 (yellow). Indicates IDNet status.

• Slow blink: Class A open circuit trouble.

• Fast blink: Short circuit trouble.

• On steady: No devices detected/ channel failure.

• Normally off.

LED6 (yellow). Indicates power supply status.

• Single blink: Positive earth fault.

• Double blink: Negative earth fault.

• Triple blink: Battery trouble.

• Quadruple blink: Charger trouble.

• On steady: Overcurrent fault.

• Normally off.

LED7 (green). Illuminates when the power supply is powered from the AC line. Off when the power supply is de-energized, or when it is using battery backup power.

5-6

Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

Troubleshooting

Overview This section contains explanations of trouble messages that may appear on the 4100ES display when using the SPS. Heading text in the left margin shows the error message, while the paragraph next to it describes the likely cause of the message.

IDNet Power Monitor Trouble

There is no output voltage from the power supply.

Extra Device Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been configured for the IDNet channel) are one the system. Only one message appears, regardless of the number of extra devices found.

Class A Trouble There is an open on the IDNet channel. A hardware reset is required to reset the trouble.

Earth Fault Search

Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the search is initiated, the front panel display indicates how far along the search process has progressed (10%, 25%… 75%), and then shows the results of the search. The result either identifies the offending circuit or indicates that the earth fault could not be found. SPS circuits (IDNet, NAC, and aux power) are searched. System alarm and trouble processing is suspended during the search.

Short Circuit Appears when a short is detected on the IDNet channel. This status clears automatically when the short circuit is removed.

Channel Fail Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured, and when none of the devices are communicating on the channel. This message does not appear if there are no configured devices on the IDNet channel.

No Answer/Bad Answer

Occurs when the 4100ES is put into a diagnostic mode and finds a device not responding, or responding unreliably. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for information on how to perform this diagnostic.

Output Abnormal Occurs when 24 VDC is not present on TrueAlarm devices or when TrueAlarm sensor bases with relay driver outputs are not properly supervised or when isolator devices are in isolation mode.

6-1

Chapter 6

4100ES SPS Field Wiring

Introduction This chapter shows how 4100ES devices are wired to notification appliances. Most of the connections shown herein are reverse-polarity NACs, IDNet circuits, and power circuits.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

General Field Wiring Guidelines 6-2

Power Supply Wiring Distances 6-5

SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines 6-7

SPS NAC Wiring 6-8

SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines 6-10

SPS IDNet Wiring 6-11

SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring 6-13

SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring 6-15

6-2

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

General Field Wiring Guidelines

General Guidelines

Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before wiring:• All wires must be 18 AWG, or as the local code dictates.• Conductors must test free of all grounds.• All wiring must be done using copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.• If shielded wire is used,

- the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable length.- the entire length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 Megohm to earth ground.

• Underground wiring must be free of all water.• In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, the 2081-9027 Transient

Suppressor should be used on monitor points.• Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.• Wires that run in plenum must be in conduit.• Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder), crimped in

metal sleeves, or encapsulated with an epoxy resin. When soldering or crimped metal sleeves are used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical tape that is as sound as the original insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.

• A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This connection must comply with approved earth detection per NFPA780.

• Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit.

6-3

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

General Field Wiring Guidelines (continued)

Power-Limited Guidelines

Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before wiring for power-limited systems:

• Non-power limited field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection) must be installed and routed in the shaded areas shown in Table 6-1.

• Power-limited field wiring must be installed and routed in the non-shaded areas shown in Table 6-1, with the exception of City wiring.

• Excess slack should be kept to a minimum inside the back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly dressed and bundled together using wire ties. Anchor power-limited wiring to tie points, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1. Power-Limited Wiring• Tie the wiring located between bays to the internal wiring troughs, if applicable.• When powering remote units or switching power through relay contacts, power for these circuits must

be provided by a power-limited power supply listed for fire-protective signaling use. An EOL relay must be used to supervise the auxiliary power circuit.

Continued on next page

CONDUIT ENTRANCE FOR POWER-LIMITED

WIRING

POWER-LIMITED WIRING

CONDUIT ENTRANCE FOR NON-POWER LIMITED WIRING

TIE POINT (LOCATION MAY VARY)

NON-POWER LIMITED WIRING

6-4

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

General Field Wiring Guidelines (continued)

Power-Limited Guidelines

• Auxiliary power only: Supervision must be provided if the auxiliary power circuit is to be wired as a power-limited circuit. In order to connect a circuit using power-limited wiring, the devices being powered must all be addressable, or a UL Listed EOL relay must be used to supervise the circuit. Refer to Figure 6-2 for wiring directions for the EOL relay.

Figure 6-2. The EOL Relay

2098-9739END OF

LINE RELAY

TO AUX POWER

RED BLACK

LAST IDCDEVICE

YELLOW

RESISTORIDC

Note: The 2098-9739 Relay is used as an example. Other UL Listed 24VDC EOL relays can be used, depending on the application.

6-5

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

Power Supply Wiring Distances

Overview Before wiring from any type of power supply to notification appliances, check Table 6-1 and Table 6-2 for wiring distances.

Class A NAC Wiring Table

Table 6-1 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a Class A configuration, depending on wire gauge and current. Use Table 6-1 to calculate wire distances for your application if you are using Class A wiring.

• Max Distance = distance from SPS/RPS to last appliance.• This table is calculated at 49 degrees Centigrade (120 degrees Fahrenheit). If you are installing in

locations that could be exposed to higher temperatures, refer to NEC Table 8.• Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.• If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire-rated enclosure, reduce wiring

distances by 38 feet (12 m) for every 10 feet (3 m) of potential exposure.

Table 6-1. Class A Wiring Distances

Alarm Current @ 24 VDC

Max Distance with 18 AWG

Max Distance with 16 AWG

Max Distance with 14 AWG

Max Distance with 12 AWG

DC Resistance

0.25 A 420 ft. (128 m) 667 ft. (203 m) 1,063 ft. (324 m) 1,691 ft. (515 m) 6 Ohms

0.50 A 210 ft. (64 m) 334 ft. (102 m) 532 ft. (162 m) 845 ft. (258 m) 3 Ohms

0.75 A 140 ft. (43 m) 222 ft. (68 m) 354 ft. (108 m) 564 ft. (172 m) 2 Ohms

1.00 A 105 ft. (32 m) 167 ft. (51 m) 266 ft. (81 m) 423 ft. (129 m) 1.5 Ohms

1.25 A 84 ft. (26 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 213 ft. (65 m) 338 ft. (103 m) 1.2 Ohms

1.50 A 70 ft. (21 m) 111 ft. (34 m) 177 ft. (54 m) 282 ft. (86 m) 1 Ohm

1.75 A 60 ft. (18 m) 95 ft. (29 m) 152 ft. (46 m) 242 ft. (74 m) 0.86 Ohm

2.00 A 53 ft. (16 m) 83 ft. (25 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 211 ft. (64 m) 0.75 Ohm

2.25 A 47 ft. (14 m) 74 ft. (23 m) 118 ft. (36 m) 188 ft. (57 m) 0.67 Ohm

2.50 A 42 ft. (13 m) 67 ft. (20 m) 106 ft. (32 m) 169 ft. (51 m) 0.60 Ohm

2.75 A 38 ft. (12 m) 61 ft. (19 m) 97 ft. (30 m) 154 ft. (47 m) 0.55 Ohm

3.00 A 35 ft. (11 m) 56 ft. (17 m) 89 ft. (27 m) 141 ft. (43 m) 0.50 Ohm

6-6

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

Power Supply Wiring Distances (continued)

Class B NAC Wiring Table

Table 6-2 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a Class B configuration, depending on wire gauge and current. Use Table 6-2 to calculate wire distances for your application if you are using Class B wiring.

Note: • Max Distance = distance from SPS or RPS to last appliance.• This table is calculated at 49 degrees Centigrade (120 degrees Fahrenheit). If you are installing in

locations that could be exposed to higher temperatures, refer to NEC Table 8.• Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.• If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire rated enclosure, reduce wiring distances

by 38 feet (12 m) for every 10 feet (3 m) of potential exposure.

Table 6-2. Class B Wiring Distances

Alarm Current @ 24 VDC

Max Distance with 18 AWG

Max Distance with 16 AWG

Max Distance with 14 AWG

Max Distance with 12 AWG

DC Resistance

0.25 A 840 ft. (256 m) 1,335 ft. (407 m) 2,126 ft. (648 m) 3,382 ft. (1,031 m) 12 Ohms

0.50 A 420 ft. (128 m) 667 ft. (203 m) 1,063 ft. (324 m) 1,691 ft. (515 m) 6 Ohms

0.75 A 280 ft. (85 m) 445 ft. (136 m) 709 ft. (216 m) 1,127 ft. (344 m) 4 Ohms

1.00 A 210 ft. (64 m) 334 ft. (102 m) 532 ft. (162 m) 845 ft. (258 m) 3 Ohms

1.25 A 168 ft. (51 m) 267 ft. (81 m) 425 ft. (130 m) 676 ft. (206 m) 2.4 Ohms

1.50 A 140 ft. (43 m) 222 ft. (68 m) 354 ft. (108 m) 564 ft. (172 m) 2 Ohms

1.75 A 120 ft. (37 m) 191 ft. (58 m) 304 ft. (93 m) 483 ft. (147 m) 1.71 Ohms

2.00 A 105 ft. (32 m) 167 ft. (51 m) 266 ft. (81 m) 423 ft. (129 m) 1.5 Ohms

2.25 A 93 ft. (28 m) 148 ft. (45 m) 236 ft. (72 m) 376 ft. (115 m) 1.33 Ohms

2.50 A 84 ft. (26 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 213 ft. (65 m) 338 ft. (103 m) 1.2 Ohms

2.75 A 76 ft. (23 m) 121 ft. (37 m) 193 ft. (59 m) 307 ft. (94 m) 1.09 Ohms

3.00 A 70 ft. (21 m) 111 ft. (34 m) 177 ft. (54 m) 282 ft. (86 m) 1 Ohm

6-7

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines

Guidelines Review the following guidelines for NACs before you begin NAC field wiring.

• All wiring is 18 AWG (minimum) to 12 AWG (maximum).• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.• The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit. The supervisory current is 2.03 mA at

24 VDC.• The nominal voltage rating is 24 VDC, 2 V p-p ripple (maximum).• The total available current from the SPS is 9 A, unless it is used for REGULATED • 24 VDC notification appliances, where the SPS/RPS is rated for 4Amps notification. Any current used

for card power by modules plugged into the PDI, as well as any auxiliary 24 VDC current, must be deducted from the total available current.

• Terminal designations “+” and “-” are for the alarm state.• All 4901-, 4903- and 4904- series appliances are Special Application with SPS. SPS is rated 9A, 3A

per circuit. SPS regulated rating per UL864 is 4A maximum per SPS. Compatible TrueAlert non-addressable appliances for NACs are:

- 4901-series Horn1

- 4903-series A/V1

- 4903-series S/V1

- 4904-series V/O1

- 4906-Multi-Candela-series A/V, V/O, S/V, and others1

- 49CMT-series, Multi-Tone1, 2

- 49CMTV-series, Multi-Tone/Multi-Candela1, 2

1 A maximum of 70 appliances can be supported per circuit.2 Each 49CMT and 49CMTV series appliance counts as 2.7 regular appliances and no

more than 25 49CMT or 20 49CMTV-series appliances may be placed on one circuit.

6-8

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS NAC Wiring

Class A NAC Wiring

To connect the SPS to reverse-polarity, non-addressable notification appliances using Class A wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure 6-3.

1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the “B+”, “B-”, and SHIELD outputs on TB2 of the SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2, or NAC3.

2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. Repeat for each appliance.3. Route wire from the last appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on the same NAC circuit of TB1

of the SPS.4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.5. Leave the 10 K, ½ W, brown/black/orange resistor (378-030) on each unused circuit. The

circuit must connect “B+” to “B-” terminals. No external end-of-line resistor is needed for circuits in use.

Figure 6-3. Class A NAC Wiring

P1321

B+ B- A+ A-

TYPICALAPPLIANCE

RED

RED

RED

NAC1

B+ B- A+ A-

NAC1

B+ B- A+ A-

NAC1

LED1 LED2 LED3

TYPICALAPPLIANCE

BLK

BLK

BLK

NAC2 NAC3

12 AWG to 18AWG

IMPORTANT: Conductors must test free of all grounds.

Leave the 378-030 EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W; brown/black/orange) on unused circuits

Ferrite beads required for RF immunity

to CE specified levels. Use kit 4100-5129.

6-9

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS NAC Wiring (continued)

Class B NAC Wiring

To connect the SPS to appliances using Class B wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure 6-4.

1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the B+, B-, and SHIELD outputs on TB2 of the SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2, or NAC3.

2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. “T” tapping is not allowed. Repeat for each appliance.

3. Route wire from the last appliance to the EOLR harness (10K ohm, 1/2W: P/N 733-894, PID# 4081-9008).

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.5. Leave the factory installed EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W; brown/black/orange) on each

unused circuit. The circuit must connect “B+” to “B-” terminals.

Figure 6-4. Class B WiringNote: • Notification appliances are rated per individual nameplate label.• Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.

P1321

B+ B- A+ A-

TYPICALAPPLIANCE

KLBDER

NAC1

B+ B- A+ A-

NAC1

B+ B- A+ A-

NAC1

LED1 LED2 LED3

TYPICALAPPLIANCE

10K 1/2W (133-894)

NAC2 NAC3

DERDER

DERDER

IMPORTANT: Conductors must test free of all grounds.

12 AWG to 18AWG

BLK

BLK

BLK

4081-9008 EOL Harness

Leave the factory installed EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W; brown/black/orange) on unused circuits

Ferrite bead required for RF immunity to CE

specified levels. Use kit 4100-5129.

6-10

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines

IDNet Wiring Up to 250 IDNet initiating devices are supported on the SPS IDNet channel. The SPS supports both Class A and Class B wiring.

Class A wiring allows IDNet appliances to communicate with the SPS even in the event of a single open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed from the SPS to each IDNet appliance, and then back again to the SPS.

Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A. Additionally, Class B wiring does not require end-of-line resistors, because each IDNet appliance communicates directly to the SPS.

Guidelines Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before installing the cards. • For Style 4 operation:

- The maximum distance to any device is 2500 feet (762 m) for 126-250 devices, or 4000 feet (1220 m) if 125 or fewer devices are used.

- “T” taps are allowed.- The maximum total wire allowed is 10,000 feet, or 0.58uF.- Maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58 uF. For

applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance from line to line plus the shield to either line is no more than 0.58 uF.

• For Style 6 operation, the maximum loop distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). “T” taps are not allowed.

• Use supplied ferrite beads with the SPS. Loop wires once through the supplied ferrite beads as shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5. Loop Wiring as Shown

6-11

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS IDNet Wiring

Class A Wiring 1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the B+, B-, and SHIELD outputs on TB1 of the SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral IDNet appliance.

2. Route wire from the first IDNet appliance to the next one. Repeat for each appliance.3. Route wire from the last IDNet appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on TB1 of the SPS.

Figure 6-6. Class A Wiring

B+ B- SHLD

IDNet

A+P1

321A-

IDNetDEVICE

IDNetDEVICE

IDNetDEVICE

IDNet LOOP(CLASS A / STYLE G)

IMPORTANT:

Max. allowed wire capacitance is .58uF. Maximum distance to any device is 2500 feet (126-250 devices) or 4000 feet (up to 125 devices)

Class A wiring must consider the above limits under worst-case fault conditions. Neither the "A" or "B" terminals may exceed the distances noted above.

IDNetDEVICE

IDNetDEVICE

IDNetDEVICE

Ferrite beads required.

6-12

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS IDNet Wiring (continued)

Class B Wiring 1. On TB1, jumper B+ to A+, and jumper B- to A-.

2. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the A+, A-, and SHIELD outputs on TB1 of the SPS to a junction box. Begin “T” tapping at the junction box. The maximum distance between the SPS and an IDNet appliance is 2,500 feet (762 m). The maximum wiring distance for any IDNet circuit is 10,000 feet (3,048 m) or 0.58 uF.

Figure 6-7 shows Class B wiring.

Figure 6-7. Class B Wiring

B+ B- SHLD

IDNet

A+P1

321A-

IDNet LINES TO DEVICES(CLASS B / STYLE 4)

IMPORTANT:

Max. allowed wire load is 10,000 feet total or .58uF. Maximum distance to any device is 2500 feet (126-250 devices) or 4000 feet (up to 125 devices)

Ferrite bead required.

6-13

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring

Guidelines • All wiring is 18 AWG and 12 AWG.• All wiring is power-limited.• When a NAC is configured as an auxiliary power circuit, no end-of-line resistor is used.• Auxiliary power may be taken from the dedicated auxiliary power tap or from an unused

NAC.• If auxiliary power is taken from NAC terminals, the NAC must be configured as an

auxiliary power point type in the 4100 Programmer.• Remove end-of-line resistors from NACs when used for auxiliary power.• External wiring from the dedicated auxiliary power tap is not supervised unless an end-of-

line relay is wired coil to auxiliary power, and Normally Open contacts are monitored by a system power point. Relay current must be considered as part of the load. When NACs are used as aux. power taps, they are supervised for overcurrent or short-circuit faults.

• All wiring that leaves the building requires overvoltage protection. Install module 2081-9044 wherever wire enters or exits the building. A maximum of four 2081-9044 Modules may be connected to one channel.

• Voltage rating: 24 VDC (nominal), 2 V P-P ripple (maximum).• The following devices are compatible with 24VDC aux. power:

- 2088-series relays and door holders- 2098-series four-wire smoke detectors- 2190-series monitor and signal ZAMs- 4090-series IDNet ZAMs- 4098-series four-wire smoke detectors and duct detectors- 2190-9039 Printer- 4190-9050/9051 4-20 mA ZAMs- 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator

• The total auxiliary current available is 5 A. The total current available for the entire SPS is 9A (special application) or 4A regulated 24VDC, including NAC, auxiliary, and card power.

6-14

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring (continued)

Wiring The SPS can connect to auxiliary power appliances via the dedicated auxiliary power tap (TB3). If more power is needed, any of the three NAC outputs can be used for auxiliary power.

Figure Notes:1. Maximum allowed NAC current consumption (aux power plus NACs): 9A (Special Application) or 4A regulated 24V dc.2. Maximum per NAC: 3 A

3. Maximum allowed auxiliary power current consumption: 5A (total supply).

4. Maximum per auxiliary output: 2 A

5. Class A wiring is possible only if a 4090-9117 Power Isolator is used.

6. International systems require ferrite beads. Use kit 4100-5129.

Figure 6-8. Auxiliary Power Wiring

B+

0V 24VAUX POWER

B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-

AUXILIARYPOWER

AUXILIARYPOWER

AUXILIARYPOWER

AUXILIARYPOWER

Devices

Primary Return

TB1 TB2

24V0V

TB1 TB2

To SPS/ RPS

Class A aux power wiring requires the use of 4090-9117 IDNet Power Isolators, as shown above.

4090-9117 ISOLATOR

4090-9117 ISOLATOR

SPS

TB2

TB3

Dedicated auxiliary power screw terminal (configured in the Programmer)

NAC points must be reconfigured as auxiliary power output points in the programmer

12 AWG to 18 AWG

Ferrite bead Required for RF immunity to CE specified levels. Use kit 4100-5129.

12 AWG to 18 AWG

6-15

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring

Guidelines The SPS includes one on-board, programmable relay.

• All wiring must be between 18 AWG and 12 AWG.• When power through auxiliary contacts provided by the SPS, wiring is power-limited.• When power through auxiliary contacts is not provided by the SPS, use an in-line fuse

(208-165). If the power source is not power-limited to the requirements of UL864, wiring is to be segregated to the non-power-limited spaces of the cabinet.

• The relay circuit is not supervised.• The relay circuit is rated to switch 2 A at 30 VAC or 30 VDC, resistive load.• Relay contacts are Form C dry contacts. Suppression is provided to Earth. Do not switch

voltages greater than rating, or damage may result.

Wiring Figure 6-9 shows SPS auxiliary relay wiring.

Figure 6-9. Auxiliary Relay Wiring

B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-

SPS

TB2

TB4

12 AWG to 18AWG

Dedicated auxiliaryrelay terminal block

NORMALLYCLOSED

COMMON

NORMALLYOPEN

NO C NC

7-1

Chapter 7

EPS with IDNet 2

Introduction This chapter describes how the EPS with an IDNet 2 card is installed and configured by the factory. Check the information in this chapter to make sure the EPS is installed correctly.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

EPS Specifications 7-2

EPS Configuration 7-3

EPS IDNet 2 Configuration 7-5

Connections 7-6

Troubleshooting 7-7

7-2

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

EPS Specifications

Card Specifications

Table 7-1. Card Specifications

Figure 7-1. EPS Card Layout

Operating Conditions

32oF - 120oF (0oC-49oC)Up to 93% relative humidity at 90oF (32oC), non-condensing.

Electrical Specifications

AC Input Specifications: Note: Maximum circuit breaker is 20A.

120 V, 50/60 Hz, 4.6 A

220/230/240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A

DC Output Specifications: 29 V @ 9 AUp to 5A normal standby (AUX, "Card Power" and Backplane Power). Any non-alarm current must be subtracted from 9A alarm current.

DC Input(battery standby)

Standby – No alarms, SLCs normal: 135 mA / Alarm - 12A @ 24V

With IDNet 2: 235 mA

Per IDNet/IDNAC device: 0.8 mA

Internal Battery Charger

Charges up to 50 Ah (ULC-S527) or 115 Ah (UL-864 Listing) sealed lead-acid batteries connected to the power supply.

High Voltage Output: 29 V

Output Current Limit: 3.3 A

IDNAC SLCs 29.5V maximum @ 3A per circuit; 4,000 bits/second

Earth Fault Earth fault detection is 10k minimum to any circuit.

SNAC wiring fault Detection

Short circuit detection is 5k ohms maximum for SNAC. Open circuit detection is 15k.

Battery Standby(sealed lead-acid batteries)

Battery standby requirements are dependent on system configuration. The 4100ES can support up to 115 Ah batteries (UL) and 50 Ah batteries (ULC). With 115 Ah batteries, a system could be configured to draw 3.8A for 24 hours, followed by 15 minutes at 9.375A. Or a configuration with 0.375A for 24 hours and 5 minutes alarm at 9.375 would require 12.7 Ah batteries or larger. Refer to Sales Engineering Calculation Tool for specific configurations.

IDNACTerminals

Auxiliary/NAC

RUI+ EarthDetect

Connection to Batterries

Connectionto Bridge

Battery DisconectJumper

AddressSwitch

Trouble ScrollButton

Earth Detect Jumper

4 Pin HarnessCard Power / Comms

Connectionto PDI

LEDs

City Card Connection

21

37

65

48

ABCDECH1CH2CH3COM

IDNet 2Card

IDNET 2

12

34

56

78

B+B-A+A-B+B-A+A-LOOP 1LOOP 2

7-3

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

EPS Configuration

Setting the EPS Address

The DIP Switch SW2 is used to set the EPS address as identified in the Panel Programmer job (see the section on Programming for more information). From left to right, these switches are designated as SW2-1 through SW2-8. The function of these switches is as follows:

Table 7-2. EPS Card Addresses

• SW2-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the 4100 CPU. Set this switch to ON.

• SW2-2 through SW1-8. These switches set the card’s address within the FACP. Refer to Table 7-2 for a complete list of the switch settings for all of the possible card addresses.

You must set these switches to the value assigned to the module by the Panel Programmer.

Figure 7-2. DIP Switch SW2

ON

OFF

(DIP Switch shown is set at address 31)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Most Significant BitLeast Significant Bit

Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-81 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

7-4

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

EPS Configuration (continued)

Earth Connect Jumper

The EPS Earth Fault Enable/Disable jumper allows you to enable or disable Earth Fault detection.

• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2

• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3

Figure 7-3. Earth Connect Jumper Positions

Earth Fault detection is set to active on one EPS per battery location. A battery location is any cabinet connected to the master 4100 communications channel without a TIC. A transponder cabinet is another battery location. Only ONE earth fault circuit should be active on all power supplies (EPS, TPS, SPS, RPS) within a battery location. Disable earth fault detection on all other power supplies at a battery location. Any system that includes one or more EPS MUST have earth detection from an EPS.

Battery Disconnect Jumper

Jumper P16 selects Low Battery operation. • Jumper in Top position (pins 2-3) will cause panel shutdown when batteries are depleted.

• Jumper in Bottom position (pins 1-2) will allow panel to continue operating.

For S527 compliance, jumper must be installed to top position of P16.

Note: When jumper is set to pins 2-3, EPS will not power-up from battery.

Figure 7-4. Battery Disconnect Jumper Positions

3 2 1

Function Enabled

Function Disabled

P18

3

2

1

P16

Shut DownWhen Depleted Continue

OperationWhen Depleted

7-5

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

EPS IDNet 2 Configuration

Setting the Address

The DIP Switch SW1 is used to set the IDNet 2 address as identified in the Panel Programmer job (see the section on Programming for more information). From left to right, these switches are designated as SW1-1 through SW1-8. The function of these switches is as follows:

Table 7-3. 4100-3109 Card Addresses

• SW1-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the 4100 CPU. Set this switch to ON.

• SW1-2 through SW1-8. These switches set the card’s address within the FACP. Refer to Table 7-3 for a complete list of the switch settings for all of the possible card addresses.

You must set these switches to the value assigned to the card by the Panel Programmer.

Figure 7-5. DIP Switch SW1

ON

OFF

(DIP Switch shown is set at address 31)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Most Significant BitLeast Significant Bit

Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-81 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

7-6

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

Connections

Connection to the Power Distribution Module

The EPS is powered by the Power Distribution Module (PDM). The PDM takes power directly from a dedicated AC line and the two backup batteries, and distributes power to each bay in the cabinet.

To connect the EPS to the PDM using Harness 734-257:

1. Ensure that the PDM is connected to an incoming 120 VAC power source. Keep the AC wires to the right side of the cabinet, in the non-power-limited area, and at least one inch away from all other wires.

2. Connect the harness connector to the PDM.

3. Connect the separate Red and Black wires (with Yellow female terminations) to Plugs P2 (Black) and P3 (Red) on the EPS.

4. Connect the White and Black wires, which terminate together in a White snap-on connector, to the bulkhead connector at the bottom of the EPS assembly.

Figure 7-6. PDM/Battery Connections

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5

EPS

120 V TO TRANSFORMER THROUGH BULKHEAD CONNECTOR

RED WIRE

BLACK WIRE P2P3

BATTERY HARNESS

FUSED AT 20 A

HARNESS 733-015 TO 24 V BATTERY

HARNESS(734-257)

(734-258)*

GROUND

BACK BOX GROUND SCREW

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS APPEAR IN ITALICS.

CA

V022

CA

V032

CA

V042

TU

EN

50/60 Hz 2.3 A

566-248PDM TERMINAL

BLOCK

120 V NEUTRAL

120 VAC 50, 60 Hz, 4.6 A

FERRITEBEAD

PDM(566-246) (or 566-248; see below)*

Bottom viewof the EPS assembly

Bulkhead connector

Second bulkheadconnector here in 220/ 230/240 Vversion

7-7

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

Troubleshooting

LED Trouble Indicator Overview

The code produced by the lit indicator LEDs corresponds to a trouble that is either occurring on the System or on the SLC Channels. See Table 7-4 for the LED definitions. See Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 for the LEDs and their codes.

Table 7-4. The 8 EPS indicator LEDs.

System Trouble LED Codes

System troubles are indicated by LEDs A to E.

Table 7-5. System Trouble LED Codes

LED: A, B, C, D, E

These 5 yellow LEDs are used to signal various trouble conditions on the EPS and its SLC. See the troubleshooting section for LED system codes.

Figure 7-7. LED Location

LED:CH1, CH2, CH3

These LEDs report any troubles on the corresponding SLC channels.

LED COMM Indicates a 4100 Comms trouble.

Scroll Push Button (SW1)

The “Trouble Scroll” button to is used to scroll through multiple troubles, since only one trouble can be displayed at a time.

Trouble ScrollButton

LEDs

21

37

65

48

ABCDECH1CH2CH3COM

A B C D E Description:

No Trouble: There are no troubles detected on the system.

AC Fail: The AC power is disconnected but the battery is working.

Low Battery: The battery charge is under 22 V.

Battery Cutout: The Battery charge is below 20V. At this point if jumper P16 is set to “battery disconnect when depleted” the system will shut down.

Depleted/Missing Battery: If jumper P16 is not set to “battery disconnect when depleted” this trouble will appear when the battery charge is below 20 V. This code will also appear if the system cannot detect the battery.

Charger Trouble: There is a trouble with the battery charger.

Card Overcurrent: The EPS module is drawing too much current.

Negative Earth: The circuit is shorted to ground on the negative wire.

Positive Earth: The circuit is shorted to ground on the positive wire.

Negative Earth on RUI+: The RUI circuit is shorted to ground on the negative wire

Positive Earth on RUI+: The RUI circuit is shorted to ground on the positive wire.

City Circuit 1 Trouble: The trouble configured on the City Card’s circuit one has bee triggered.

City Circuit 2 Trouble: The trouble configured on the City Card’s circuit two has bee triggered.

AuxNAC Open: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the Aux circuit or the NAC circuit is open.

AuxNAC Short: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the Aux circuit or the NAC circuit is experiencing a short circuit.

AuxNAC Overcurrent: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the Aux circuit or the NAC circuit drawing too much current.

Unassigned.

Unassigned.

7-8

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

Troubleshooting (continued)

SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes

SLC Channel troubles are indicated by LEDs A to E, as well as LEDs CH1, CH2, and CH3.

The channel LEDs, CH1, CH2, and CH3 indicate the channel which is experiencing the trouble. For example, if the CH1 LED is lit, the trouble is occurring on SLC channel 1.

The lettered LEDs, A to E, describe the trouble.

Table 7-6. SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes

CH1 CH2 CH3 A B C D E Description:

IDNAC Channel Fail: The channel is not responding.

IDNAC Short Circuit: There is a short circuit on the channel.

IDNAC Duplicate Device: There are 2 devices on the channel that have the same address.

IDNAC Missing device: There is a device programmed on the channel that it cannot detect.

IDNAC Extra Device: The channel is detecting the address of a device that has not been programmed.

IDNAC Wrong Device: The channel is detecting a device that had been programed as the wrong “type”.

IDNAC Controller Fail: The channel can no longer detect the controller.

IDNAC Address Out of Range: There is a device with an unsupported address on the channel.

IDNAC Isolator Trouble: An isolator on the channel is open.

IDNAC Overcurrent: A device on the Channel is drawing too much current.

IDNAC Earth Trouble: There is a positive or a negative earth fault on the channel.

Unassigned

Unassigned

7-9

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

Troubleshooting (continued)

Trouble Messages Table 7-7 explains the EPS trouble messages that may appear on the FACP display.

Table 7-7. EPS Trouble Messages

Message Definition

AC Fail AC power is not present or is too low for proper system operation

Low Battery The battery voltage is below the 24 V nominal level by 10% or more.

Depleted/Missing Battery

The battery is either below 20 V or completely undetected.

Card Overcurrent The EPS is drawing more current than it should. Check for faults on the circuit.

Charger The battery charger is either defective or being heavily loaded by batteries. Read charger current at front panel, if charger current is approximately 3 A, batteries are likely loading the charger. Remove battery connection and measure the output of the EPS. If the output is 27.6 (or close, temperature dependent), there is a possibility of depleted batteries or a bad set of batteries. Allow batteries to charge or replace them if they do not take a charge.

Extra Device Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been configured for the IDNAC channel) are one the system. Only one message appears, regardless of the number of extra devices found.

Earth Fault Search Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the search is initiated, the front panel display indicates how far along the search process has progressed (10%, 25%…75%), and then shows the results of the search. The result either identifies the offending circuit or indicates that the earth fault could not be found. EPS circuits (IDNet, IDNAC, and aux power) are searched. System alarm and trouble processing is suspended during the search.

Short Circuit Appears when a short is detected on the IDNAC channel. This status clears automatically when the short circuit is removed.

Channel Fail Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured, and when none of the devices are communicating on the channel. This message does not appear if there are no configured devices on the IDNAC channel.

8-1

Chapter 8

EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

Introduction This chapter describes the EPS wiring. This includes the wiring of the IDNet 2 card.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

EPS Wiring Overview 8-2

EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring 8-3

EPS Wiring Tables 8-5

EPS Wiring to Devices 8-7

EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring 8-9

IDNet 2 Card Wiring 8-10

8-2

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring Overview

General Wiring Guidelines

• Conductors must test free of all grounds.

• All wiring must be done using copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.

• If shielded wire is used:

- the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable length.

- the entire length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 Megohm to earthground.

• Underground wiring must be free of all water.

• In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, the 2081-9027 Transient Suppressor should be used on monitor points.

• Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.

• Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder), crimped in metal sleeves, or encapsulated with an epoxy resin. When soldering or crimped metal sleeves are used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical tape that is as sound as the original insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.

• A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This connection must comply with approved earth detection per NFPA780.

• Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit.

Power-Limited Guidelines

• Non-power limited field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection) must be installed and routed in the shaded areas shown in Figure 8-1.

• Power-limited field wiring must be installed and routed in the non-shaded shown in Figure 8-1, with the exception of City wiring.Excess slack should be kept to a minimum inside the back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly dressed and bundled together using wire ties. Anchor power-limited wiring to tie points.

• Tie the wiring located between bays to the internal wiring troughs, if applicable.

• When powering remote units or switching power through relay contacts, power for these circuits must be provided by a power-limited power supply listed for fire-protective signaling use.

Figure 8-1. Power-Limited Wiring Guidelines

Conduit Entrance for Non-Power Limited Wiring Conduit Entrance for

Power-Limited Wiring

Non-Power Limited Wiring (Route in Shaded Area Only) Power-Limited Wiring

Tie Point (Location May Vary)

8-3

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring

Wiring Overview The EPS has three SLCs for power and communication wiring.

Each SLC powers and communicates with up to 127 IDNAC devices. The EPS is wired to compatible devices and appliances, such as the TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert Addressable lines (both multi and fixed candela), using Class B circuitry.

Class B wiring allows “T” tapping. EPS wiring is inherently supervised due to individual device level communications. End-of-line resistors are not required.

IDNAC Wiring Guidelines

Review the following guidelines for IDNACs before you begin the field wiring.

• Only IDNAC and other compatible devices are allowed on the SLCs.

• Maximum of 127 devices or 139 unit loads per channel. The maximum number of visuals that can be synchronized on one circuit is 127.

• Maximum of six isolators between any appliance and SLC terminals. Maximum 12 isolators per SLC.

• Maximum 30 devices connected directly to any isolator terminal pair.

• The required wire is UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair). This wiring must have a capacitive rating of less than 60 pF/ft and a minimum 3 twists (turns) per foot.

• All wiring is 18 AWG to 12 AWG.

• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.

• The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit.

• Maximum cable load is 10,000 feet (3,048 m) per channel. Maximum wire length from panel to any device is 2,500 feet (762 m).

• The nominal voltage rating is 29 VDC.

• The total available current from the EPS is 9 A.

• All visible appliances wired from an EPS are synchronized to appliances on SPS, XPS, TPS, 4009A, 4009T and other EPS within the system. Appliances wired from TrueAlert Adapter (4905-9816) are not synchronized to other system appliances.

IDNAC Speaker Wiring Application Guidelines

Note: TrueAlert ES speaker appliances supervise connected audio circuits for open-circuit conditions and report those troubles to the host FACP through the EPS. They can also detect short circuit conditions, but the EPS reports such events as an open circuit. The panel reports these conditions as AUDIO WIRING TROUBLE. The amplifier electronics and power supply of a connected audio NAC must still supervise that circuit for short circuit conditions and earth faults.

Do not mix TrueAlert ES speakers with conventional speakers on an audio NAC.

IDNAC wire length limitations dictate the maximum audio NAC wire run length between a TrueAlert ES speaker and the connected 4100ES amplifier. The maximum IDNAC wire run length from the EPS to a device, with a Repeater extension is 8,000 feet. Because the maximum distance between the amplifier and the EPS is 2500 feet over RUI/RUI+, the total allowable distance between the amplifier and the TrueAlert ES device speaker is 10,500 feet. This distance may be further restricted by the Speaker Circuit Wiring Distance Tables of the connected amplifier.

Continued on next page

8-4

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring (continued)

IDNAC Speaker Wiring Application Guidelines

CLASS B Audio Wiring: Connect a maximum of 127 IDNAC speakers to Class B wired audio NAC. A Class B wired audio NAC connected to TrueAlert ES speakers can employ T-Tap and Wire Branch wiring topologies.

Do not connect an End-Of-Line Resistor to a class B wired audio NAC connected to TrueAlert ES speakers.

CLASS A Audio Wiring: Connect a maximum of 70 TrueAlert ES speakers to a Class A audio NAC. Speakers must be wired in a standard Class A loop fashion.

Except as noted above, audio NAC wiring connected to TrueAlert ES speakers must follow the requirements of the connected 4100ES amplifier.

Ferrite Beads Ferrite beads must be used for Class B wiring.

1. Install the ferrite bead close to the EPS field wiring terminals for lowest radiated emissions (before the wires leave the box).

2. Loop the wires through the bead as shown.

Figure 8-2. Ferrite Bead Installation

8-5

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring Tables

Class B Wiring Tables

Use the following tables to calculate the load.

TrueAlert ES Speakers and Speaker/Visible appliances must use Table 8-4 in place of Table 8-2.

Maximum wiring distance is the shorter of the distance limits as calculated by alarm current voltage drop or by reaching the communications distance limit.

Continued on next page

Table 8-1. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Alarm Current

Table 8-2. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Communication

Alarm Current

Distance to the Last Appliance Line Impedance

(Ohms)Devices

Distance to the Last Appliance

20 AWG

18 AWG

16 AWG

14 AWG

12 AWG

20 AWG

18 AWG

16 AWG

14 AWG

12 AWG

0.050 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 14.54 1 1252 ft 2038 ft 3241 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft

0.100 2644 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 12.96 5 1142 ft 1815 ft 2887 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft

0.150 1763 ft 2802 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 11.38 10 1003 ft 1595 ft 2536 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft

0.200 1322 ft 2102 ft 3342 4000 ft 4000 ft 10.14 15 893 ft 1420 ft 2258 ft 3590 ft 4000 ft

0.250 1058 ft 1681 ft 2674 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 9.12 20 804 ft 1278 ft 2033 ft 3231ft 4000 ft

0.300 881 ft 1401 ft 2228 ft 3542 ft 4000 ft 8.28 25 730 ft 1160 ft 1845 ft 2934 ft 4000 ft

0.350 755 ft 1201 ft 1910 ft 3036 ft 4000 ft 7.58 30 668 ft 1061 ft 1688 ft 2683 ft 4000 ft

0.400 661 ft 1051 ft 1671 ft 2657 ft 4000 ft 6.97 35 614 ft 977 ft 1553 ft 2469 ft 3928 ft

0.450 588 ft 934 ft 1485 ft 2362 ft 3756 6.45 40 568 ft 904 ft 1437 ft 2285 ft 3634 ft

0.500 529 ft 841 ft 1337 ft 2125 ft 3380 6.00 45 528 ft 840 ft 1336 ft 2124 ft 3378 ft

0.750 353 ft 560 ft 891 ft 1417 ft 2254 ft 5.60 50 493 ft 784 ft 1247 ft 1982 ft 3152 ft

1.000 264 ft 420 ft 668 ft 1063 ft 1690 ft 5.24 55 462 ft 734 ft 1168 ft 1856 ft 2952 ft

1.250 212 ft 336 ft 535 ft 850 ft 1352 ft 4.92 60 434 ft 690 ft 1097 ft 1744 ft 2774 ft

1.500 176 ft 280 ft 446 ft 708 ft 1127 ft 4.75 63 419 ft 665 ft 1058 ft 1682 ft 2675 ft

1.750 151 ft 240 ft 382 ft 607 ft 966 ft 4.64 65 409 ft 650 ft 1034 ft 1643 ft 2613 ft

2.000 132 ft 210 ft 334 ft 531 ft 845 ft 4.38 70 386 ft 614 ft 976 ft 1552 ft 2468 ft

2.250 118 ft 187 ft 297 ft 472 ft 751 ft 4.15 75 366 ft 581 ft 924 ft 1469 ft 2337 ft

2.500 106 ft 168 ft 267 ft 425 ft 676 ft 3.94 80 347 ft 551 ft 877 ft 1394 ft 2217 ft

2.750 96 ft 153 ft 243 ft 386 ft 615 ft 3.74 85 330 ft 524 ft 833 ft 1325 ft 2107 ft

3.000 88 ft 140 ft 223 ft 354 ft 563 ft 3.56 90 314 ft 499 ft 794 ft 1262 ft 2006 ft

Wiring distance must not exceed 4000 ft 3.40 95 299 ft 476 ft 757 ft 1203 ft 1913 ft

3.24 100 286 ft 454 ft 723 ft 1149 ft 1827 ft

Table 8-3. Ohms per 1000 ft 3.10 105 273 ft 435 ft 691 ft 1099 ft 1748 ft

Gage Ohms/1000 ft 2.97 110 262 ft 416 ft 662 ft 1052 ft 1673 ft

20 AWG 11.347 2.85 115 251 ft 399 ft 634 ft 1009 ft 1604 ft

18 AWG 7.137 2.73 120 241 ft 383 ft 609 ft 968 ft 1539 ft

16 AWG 4.488 2.58 127 228 ft 362 ft 576 ft 915 ft 1456 ft

14 AWG 2.8230 Wiring distance must not exceed 4000 ft

12 AWG 1.7750

Note: Although the required wire for IDNAC circuits is twisted pair (controlled impedance) wiring, some applications will wish to take advantage of existing wiring that is not twisted pair. This is only allowed if both conductors of the IDNAC circuit reside in the same metal conduit, and only under certain conditions. Check with your local sales office before using wiring that is not twisted pair.

8-6

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring Tables (Continued)

Table 8-4. UTP Wiring Limit for Speakers and Speaker/Visible devices based on Communication

Devices

Distance to the Last Appliance

20AWG

18AWG

16AWG

14AWG

12AWG

1 1218 ft 1936 ft 3079 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft

5 1028 ft 1634 ft 2599 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft

10 853 ft 1356 ft 2156 ft 3428 ft 4000 ft

15 715 ft 1137 ft 1807 ft 2873 ft 4000 ft

20 603 ft 959 ft 1525 ft 2424 ft 3855 ft

25 548 ft 871 ft 1385 ft 2201 ft 3500 ft

30 501 ft 797 ft 1266 ft 2013 ft 3201 ft

35 461 ft 733 ft 1165 ft 1853 ft 2946 ft

40 427 ft 678 ft 1078 ft 1714 ft 2726 ft

45 397 ft 631 ft 1002 ft 1593 ft 2534 ft

50 370 ft 588 ft 935 ft 1487 ft 2365 ft

55 347 ft 551 ft 876 ft 1393 ft 2215 ft

60 326 ft 518 ft 823 ft 1308 ft 2081 ft

63 314 ft 500 ft 794 ft 1262 ft 2007 ft

65 307 ft 488 ft 776 ft 1233 ft 1960 ft

70 290 ft 461 ft 733 ft 1165 ft 1852 ft

75 275 ft 436 ft 694 ft 1103 ft 1753 ft

80 261 ft 414 ft 658 ft 1046 ft 1663 ft

85 248 ft 394 ft 626 ft 994 ft 1581 ft

90 236 ft 375 ft 596 ft 947 ft 1505 ft

95 225 ft 357 ft 568 ft 903 ft 1436 ft

100 215 ft 341 ft 543 ft 862 ft 1371 ft

105 206 ft 326 ft 519 ft 825 ft 1311 ft

110 197 ft 313 ft 497 ft 790 ft 1256 ft

115 189 ft 300 ft 476 ft 757 ft 1204 ft

120 181 ft 288 ft 457 ft 726 ft 1155 ft

127 171 ft 272 ft 432 ft 687 ft 1092 ft

Wiring distances must not exceed 4000 ft

8-7

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring to Devices

Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices

To connect the EPS to appliances using Class B wiring:1. Route the wire from the “+” and the “-”outputs on the EPS IDNAC terminal blocks (TB1,

TB2 or TB3) to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance.

2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. “T” tapping is allowed. Repeat for each appliance.

3. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each IDNAC output you want to use.

Note: Notification appliances are rated per individual nameplate label. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections.

-05 Figure 8-3. Class B Wiring

4009 IDNAC Repeater

Using a 4009 IDNAC Repeater extends the possible wiring distance and increases the current capacity of an IDNAC channel. Each IDNAC repeater has a capacity of 3A, and regenerates the IDNAC signal. Models 4009-9601 (platinum enclosure) and 4009-9602 (red enclosure) are compatible with the EPS. Refer to installation instructions 579-1019 for wiring details. All IDNAC devices wired to the IDNAC repeater are synchronized to IDNAC devices wired to other EPS within the system.

Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI)

To wire an IDNAC as a Class A circuit, one or more DCAI modules (4100-6103) is required. Each DCAI includes 2 circuits, Class A, with fault isolation. Refer to 579-1029 for wiring details and installation instructions. Synchronization of audible/visible devices is maintained with the use of DCAI.

TrueAlert ES Speakers and Speaker/Visible appliances wired in a Class A circuit must use Table 8-4 here in place of Table 4 in publication 579-1029 (4100 ES/4007 ES Installation Instructions; 4100-6103 DCAI Card). The wiring limit distances shown in this table apply to maximum wiring loop length. The final maximum loop length is the shorter of this value or the value from Table 8-1.

IDNACDevice

IDNACDevice

IDNACDevice

IDNACDevice

IDNACDevice

IDNACDevice

FerriteBead

+ + - - + + - -+ + - -

IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3

8-8

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring to Devices (continued)

Calculating Class B wiring with Isolators

When using Isolators, the maximum wire distance of each of these SLC branches from panel to any device is the smaller of the values obtained from Table 8-2, and the Equation 1. See Table 8-3 for the ohms per 1000 ft.

• Add the alarm loads of all the devices on an SLC wire branch and apply to Equation 1.

• Add the unit loads for all devices on an SLC wire branch and the number of isolators and apply to Table 8-2.

Maximum wire resistance protected by 1 isolator is 1.5 ohm (total, both wires).

Wire the devices as instructed in the “Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices” section..

Figure 8-4. Class B Wiring With Isolators

Equation 1: Maximum SLC Wire Branch Length Based on Appliance Alarm Current Load

Distance (feet) = 6V - (.1 ohm * number of isolators on branch * branch alarm amps)

2 * (resistance per foot) * (branch alarm amps)

+ + - - + + - -+ + - -

IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3

TO OTHERDEVICES

APPLIANCE

TO OTHERDEVICES

TO OTHERDEVICES

TO OTHERDEVICES

PORT1 4905-9929

ISOLATORPORT

2PORT

1

4905-9929ISOLATOR

PORT2

PORT1

4905-9929ISOLATOR

PORT2

PORT1

4905-9929ISOLATOR

PORT2

APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE

FerriteBead

8-9

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring

AUX/ NAC Terminal

The AUX/NAC terminal block is located on the top right corner of the EPS.

Through the ES Panel Programmer, this point can be configured as either a 24V Auxiliary (AUX) power or as a simple reverse polarity Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC).

Figure 8-5. AUX/NAC Terminal

Note: Output of AUX or NAC is 24V nominal. Minimum voltage is 19.5 @ full load and minimum battery; maximum is 31.5V at light load, high AC line. Aux Loads include 4601-9101 Annunciator, 4100-96xx series Annunciators, 4090 series of IDNet ZAMs and IAMs and any Listed device operating within the output limits of the AUX. Calculate wiring loss for actual devices used. Compatible Appliances include 4904 series of free-run strobes, 4901 series non-smartsync horns, 4098 series TrueAlarm Sounder Base, 4090-9005 and -9006 SRP and 4009 NAC extenders, used in reverse-polarity activation mode.

Table 8-5. AUX/NAC Wiring Specification

Voltage rating:

24V Special Application

Rating: 2 A, maximum

Wiring gage:

18 AWG (min.) to 12 AWG (max.)

Wiring Notes:

1. All wiring from the AUX/NAC is power limited.

2. Conductors must test free of all grounds and stray voltages before connection to appliances and panel.

Figure 8-6. Simple NAC Wiring

3. Terminate Class B NACs as shown using 733- 894. For Canadian applications, mount end-of-line resistor to TEPG-US Model 431537 EOL plate in accordance with ULC-S527.

4. If circuit is terminated with a 10k EOLR, at the terminals, remove this resistor before wiring.

5. If wiring is routed outside the building, use of a listed secondary protector is required. Use Simplex 2081- 9028 or 2081-9044. A protector must be installed at each building exit/entrance. Each 2081-9028 adds 0.2 ohms wiring resistance. 2081-9044 adds 6 ohms wiring resistance, and will greatly reduce wiring distance.

Table 8-6. NAC Wiring Limits

Alarm Current 20 AWG 18 AWG 16AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG Line Resistance (Ohms)

0.25 617 ft 981 ft 1560 ft 2480 ft 3944 ft 14.00

0.50 308 ft 490 ft 780 ft 1240 ft 1972 ft 7.00

0.75 206 ft 327 ft 520 ft 827 ft 1315 ft 4.67

1.00 154 ft 245 ft 390 ft 620 ft 986 ft 3.50

1.25 123 ft 196 ft 312 ft 496 ft 789 ft 2.80

1.50 103 ft 163 ft 260 ft 413 ft 657 ft 2.33

1.75 88 ft 140 ft 223 ft 354 ft 563 ft 2.00

2.00 77 ft 123 ft 195 ft 310 ft 493 ft 1.75

Note: This Chart indicates the maximum distance for 1/4 -2A loads. Wiring distance is from the panel termi-nals to the last appliance. Use of a 2081-9044 protector reduces wiring distance.

+ + - - + + - -+ + - -

IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3 AUX

IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3 +AUX-

Auxiliary PowerTerminal Block

733-89410K EOLR

TYPICAL APPLIANCES

NAC -

NAC+

+ B- B

+ + - - + + - -+ + - -IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3 +AUX-

8-10

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

IDNet 2 Card Wiring

Wiring Overview Each output from the IDNet 2 card can be wired as either an isolated Class A circuit or as two isolated Class B circuits.

Class A wiring provides an alternate communication path that allows communication to all devices to be maintained when a single open circuit fault occurs. Class A wiring requires two wires to be routed from the IDNet 2 Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to each device, and then back to the IDNet 2 Secondary Terminals (A+, A-). Wiring is in/out, “T” tapping is not allowed.

Class B wiring allows “T” tapping. IDNet 2 wiring is inherently supervised due to individual device level communications. End-of-line resistors are not required.

Wiring Parameters

Table 8-7 identifies the IDNet 2 card wiring parameters that must be considered when installing this card. For additional wiring information see the applicable installation documentation, or contact your authorized Simplex Product Supplier.

Table 8-7. IDNet 2 Card Wiring Parameters

Wiring Capacitance Parameters

Parameter Value

Maximum Supported Channel Capacitance; Total of both loops

The sum of line-to-line capacitance, plus the capacitance of either line-to-shield (if shield is present) = 0.6 µF (600 nF)

Capacitance between IDNet SLCs wiring (between wires of the same polarity; plus to plus, minus to minus)

1 µF maximum (this is for multiple IDNet loops)

Wiring Distance Limits (see note below)

Channel Loading Class B Wiring, Total Channel Wir-ing Parameters, Including T-Taps

Class A Wiring, Total Channel Wiring Parameters

Up to 125 devices

126 to 250 devices

Up to 125 devices

126 to 250 devices

Total Loop Resistance 50 Ω maximum 35 Ω maximum 50 Ω maximum 35 Ω maximum

18 AWG (0.82 mm2)12 500 ft (3810m) 4000 ft (1219 m)

per loop, 12 500ft (3810m) total

2500ft (762 m) per loop, 10 000ft (3048m) total

16 AWG (1.31 mm2)

12 500 ft (3810m)5000 ft (1524 m) per loop, 12 500ft

(3810m) total

2500ft (762 m) per loop, 10 000ft (3048m) total

14 AWG (2.08 mm2)

12 AWG (3.31 mm2)

Notes: Maximum wiring distance is determined by either reaching the maximum resistance, the maximum capacitance, or the stated maximum distance, whichever occurs first. Class A maximum distances are to the farthest device on the loop from either “B” or “A” terminals. For Class B wiring, the maximum distance to the farthest device is limited to the stated Class A wiring distances. Shielded wire is not required. Twisted wire is recommended for improved noise immunity.

Wiring Considerations using 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors(2081-9044 is UL listed to Standard 1459, Standard for Telephone Equipment)

Note: External wiring must be shielded (for lightning suppression) and 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors must be installed at building exit and entrance locations.

Capacitance: Each protector adds 0.006 μF across the connected line.

Resistance: Each protector adds 3 Ω per line of series resistance; both IDNet lines are protected; 6 Ω per protector will be added to total loop resistance.

Maximum distance of a single protected wiring run is 3270 ft (1 km).

Refer to document number 574-832: 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector Installation Instructions for additional information.

8-11

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

IDNet 2 Card Wiring (continued)

Class A Wiring To wire the Loop terminals as a Class A circuit:

Figure 8-8. IDNet 2 Class A WiringClass A wiring notes:1. If no remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, device addressing can be assigned

without concern for sequence.2. If remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, the required addressing approach is to

start from the “B” side and assign each successive isolator a higher address than the isolator it proceeds.

1. Set the jumper assigned to the loop to the “A” position, as shown in Figure 8-7.

• Loop A= Jumper P1 on the IDNet 2 card• Loop B= Jumper P2 on the IDNet 2 card• Loop C= Jumper P1 on the first IDNet Loop cards• Loop D= Jumper P1 on the second IDNet Loop card

2. Shielded wire is not recommended. If shielded wires are present, cut and tape off the shield to prevent it from coming in contact with other com-ponents.

Figure 8-7. Class A Jumper Setting

3. Route the wiring from the Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding inputs on the first device.

4. Route wiring from the first device to the next as in/out. See Figure 8-8. Repeat for each device.

5. Route the wiring from the last device to the panel.

6. Connect the wiring to the corresponding Secondary Terminals (A+, A-).

+

1 21 2 1 2

IDNet 2 Card

Devices

18 to 12 AWG

8-12

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

IDNet 2 Card Wiring (continued)

Class B Wiring When wiring the loop for Class B circuits, both the B+, B- and A+, A- terminals are available

for parallel connections. Within the IDNet 2 circuitry, A+ is connected to B+, and A- is

connected to B- so circuits can stem from either one. Additionally, two wires can be connected

to each screw terminal.

To wire the Loop terminals as a Class B circuit:

Figure 8-10. IDNet 2 Class B Wiring

Class B wiring Notes:1. If no remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, device addressing can be assigned

without concern for sequence.

2. If remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, the required addressing approach is to start at the output and assign each successive isolator a higher address than the isolator it proceeds. For Class B wiring only, the “A” output and “B” output per loop are connected together in parallel for wiring convenience.

1. Set the jumper assigned to the loop to the “B” position, as shown in Figure 8-9.

• Loop 1 = Jumper P1 on the IDNet 2 card• Loop 2 = Jumper P2 on the IDNet 2 card• Loop 3 = Jumper P1 on the left IDNet Loop card• Loop 4 = Jumper P1 on the right IDNet Loop card

2. Route wiring from the Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding inputs on the first device.

It is possible to add up to 4 circuits per IDNet loop on the terminal block when using Class B wiring. See Figure 8-10 for the diagram.

3. Route wiring from the first device to the next as in/out as shown in Figure 8-10. Repeat for each device.

Figure 8-9. Class B Jumper Setting

B+ B- A+ A-

IDNet CIRCUIT AB+

TB1

1

B- A+ A-

Devices

B+, B- Terminals

2

1

4

3

Note: For Class B wiring only, up to 4 parallel wiring “T” taps may be made at the output terminal blocks

B+ B- A+ A-

2

1

2 Circuit Configuration 4 Circuit Configuration

Different Circuit Configurations

9-1

Chapter 9

PC Software Connections

Introduction The service port on the CPU daughter card allows the 4100ES panel to connect to a PC’s running important utilities, such as diagnostics, programming, CPU firmware downloading, and channel monitoring.

The panel can also connect to a remote PC through the 4100-9832 Service Modem or through the Ethernet.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Software Modes 9-2

Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port 9-4

9-2

Chapter 9 PC Software Connections

Software Modes

Software Modes There are three basic software modes that the service port or service modem can be used to connect to:

• Service and Diagnostics Mode

• Data Transfer Interface Mode

• Master Bootloader Interface Mode

Each mode is described below.

Service and Diagnostics Mode:This is the default functionality when a PC is connected to the FACP. On a PC, this mode provides application startup messages, an ASCII interface to a UI command set for diagnostics, and event reporting. A pre-configured terminal emulator is part of the 4100ES software and can be launched from the programmer. The connection to a PC is made either through the serial port, through the service modem, or through the Ethernet port.

Figure 9-1. Service and Diagnostic Interface

Data Transfer Interface Mode:In this mode, the ES Panel Programmer is enabled. This allows for slave downloading, as well as downloading a configuration and audio messages to the FACP, and uploading a configura-tion or history log from the FACP. Connection to a PC is made through the serial port, through the service modem or through the Ethernet port.

Figure 9-2. Data Transfer Interface

Continued on next page

Laptop/PC runningterminal emulation software

4100 Panel (with CPU modem card)running application

serial downloadcable

Modem Laptop/PC runningterminal emulation software

Option 1 Option 2

Laptop/PC runningProgrammer software

4100 Panel (with CPU modem card)running application

serial downloadcable

Modem Laptop/PC runningProgrammer software

Option 1 Option 2

9-3

Chapter 9 PC Software Connections

Software Modes (continued)

Software Modes Master Bootloader Interface Mode:This interface should be used when the Master executable is not functioning. It downloads the Master CPU Exec firmware and the CFG.TXT file to the CPU using the serial port.

Figure 9-3. Bootloader Interface

Laptop/PC runningterminal emulation software

4100 Panelrunning Bootloader

serial downloadcable

Laptop/PC running programming file transfer

9-4

Chapter 9 PC Software Connections

Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port

Ethernet Service Port Overview (0566-719 only)

The Ethernet service port J1 on the CPU card (0566-719) is used to connect the panel to a local

PC. See Figure 9-4 for the port location.

Figure 9-4. CPU card ports

The Ethernet service port connects to the front panel Ethernet connection through a standard

straight (non-crossover) Ethernet Patch Cable. The service technician should connect his PC to

the CPU card through this front panel connection with a standard straight Ethernet cable (see

Figure 9-5). If this connection is not available, you may plug directly into the CPU Card connector J1 to the PC with a standard straight Ethernet cable.

Figure 9-5. Front Panel Ethernet Service Port

Serial Service Port Overview

The Serial Service Port P5 on the CPU card (0566, 149, 0566-692 and 0566-719) can also be used to connect the Panel to a local PC. See Figure 9-4 for the port location.

To use this port, the technician must connect the serial service port cable on the PC directly to the serial Service Port (P5) on the card.

SERVICE PORT (P5)(for a serial connection)

DISPLAY PORT (P6)

CONNECTOR TO CPU MOTHERBOARD (P9)

ETHERNET PORT(J1) RJ45 TYPE

SERIAL NUMBERCHIP

Emergency Op

Front PanelEthernet Service Port

10-1

Chapter 10

MNS/ECS Application

Introduction This chapter covers the configuration of a 4100ES system to operate as a mass notification system (MNS).

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System 10-2

Programming and Configuration 10-5

10-2

Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System

General Information

A 4100ES system with Basic Voice option 4100-9620 (analog) or 4100-9621 (digital) can be configured for operation as a Mass Notification System (MNS). Configuration of the system is to be done per UL2572, taking into account any special requirements resulting from a Risk Analysis.

Hierarchy of Operator Interfaces

The 4100ES main user interface serves as the primary local control unit for the in-building MNS, called the Autonomous Control Unit. It is an “authorized personnel” operator interface, that can take control of the paging and messaging features of the 4100ES system.

The ACU serves as the primary control station in the MNS, and as such has the highest priority among all operator interfaces attached to the 4100ES system, including network interfaces such as a TrueSite Workstation. The hierarchy of operation is specified by UL2572 as:

• Autonomous Control Unit (ACU)

• Local Control Unit (LOC)

• Central Command Station (CCS)

A Local Control Unit (LOC) is an in-building operator interface for authorized personnel to initiate messages and signaling in an emergency situation. An example of an LOC is a 4100 Remote Annunciator, configured with remote microphone and LED/Switch modules for activation of the paging and emergency message features of the 4100ES.

A Central Command Station (CCS) is a networked user interface, such as TrueSite Workstation. These units can activate signaling over a local in-building or campus network. A CCS is provided with a microphone, which may be a remote microphone, such as 4003-9803 wired from a 4100ES fire alarm node in the system. Another possibility would be a 4100-1244 remote microphone in a transponder bay installed into a console at the CCS location. Alternately, a 4100ES may be rack-mounted as part of the command console, and the master microphone would be available for this function.

The hierarchy of the operator interfaces is programmed using Custom Control. For example, the ACU could have a switch programmed to be a priority 3, an LOC switch could be programmed as priority 4 and a CCS could have a switch programmed as priority 5. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for detailed information about programming switch priority and writing custom control.

If transfer of control is required, LED/Switch points must be programmed to activate and to indicate the transfer of control to each desired location. These switches would be programmed at different priorities and the LEDs would indicate the status of control.

Refer to document 900-249, 4100 Upgrade Audio Enhancement Guide for details on how to configure an audio system with multiple command centers.

When any unit is in control, an LED must indicate the active control at each location. If a higher priority service takes control from a lesser priority service, that should be indicated by extinguishing the LED or indicator for the lesser priority service and lighting the LED or indicator for the greater priority service.

For example, if the LOC takes control, the CCS must be locked out from taking control and an indicator at the CCS must show that the LOC is in control. If the ACU then takes control from the LOC, the indication must change at both the LOC and CCS that the ACU now has control. In this case, both the LOC and CCS must be locked from taking control.

10-3

Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System, Continued

Priority of Signals A Mass Notification System is often a combination of fire alarm and other signals. As such, it may receive signals that affect life safety that are other than fire alarm signals. Any signal that indicates a danger to Life Safety, including fire alarm, is the highest priority. The highest priority could also include intruder alert, tornado warning, or other signals as determined by the Risk Analysis.

If multiple signals are received simultaneously, the priority of signals is:1. Signals associated with life safety

2. Signals associated with property safety3. Supervisory signals and trouble signals associated with life and/or property safety4. All other signals

In the 4100ES system, signal priority can be selected by assignment of point type and further by custom control. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for detailed information about programming input point priority and writing custom control.

Overriding Fire Alarm Signals

An MNS/ECS system must have the capability to override any other notification signals. When the 4100ES is used as a combination fire alarm/MNS, the system programming determines which signal has priority. Just as an Evacuation Message has higher priority than an Alert Message, system programming gives priority to MNS functions over other alarm functions.

In the event that a fire alarm signal is overridden by the MNS signal, and the MNS signal is then “silenced”, the building occupants need to be assured that the evacuation system is still functioning.

During the period the mass notification system has seized control of audible and/or visible notification appliances of a fire alarm, but before the mass notification relinquishes control, an audible and visible signal shall be actuated by the notification appliances at least once every thirty seconds, unless there is an active signal present, to be recognized by the usual building occupants.

With a 4100ES system, use Custom Control equations. A single flash and a short beep of audible and visible appliances meets this requirement. Alternately, an appropriate prerecorded message may be played. For example, a message instructing occupants to “shelter in place” may be played after a live microphone message. Risk Analysis by the AHJ should guide the appropriate pre-recorded messages. Switches for activation of special messages should be marked so as to be identifiable during an emergency by trained personnel.

Custom Control equations for the “chirp/flash” of audible and visible appliances are suggested below.

10-4

Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System, Continued

Timing Equations [INPUTS]STATUS ON

P711 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAS PAGING - MASS PAGING HAS PRIORITYCYCLE CONSTANT 3 25

A272 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER[END INPUTS][OUTPUTS]

TRACK ON PRI=9,9P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | TIMER FOR PAGING STROBE

[END OUTPUTS]

Appliance Control Equations

[INPUTS]STATUS ON

P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | TIMER FOR PAGING STROBE[END INPUTS][OUTPUTS]

TRACK ON PRI=9,9SIG903 | SIGB | RVISUAL | TRUEALERT ZONE 4 - ALL VISUAL DEVICES

TRACK ON PRI=9,9SIG901 | SIGB | SSIGNAL | TRUEALERT ZONE 2 - ALL AUDIBLE DEVICES

UPLAYQ CHL4=4 VOLUME=NOEFFECT NORESET NOFLUSH SPK=L260 TRK=NONE PRI=9,9

PRINT PANEL "MASS NOTIFICATION ACTIVE"USILENCE CHL4 PRI=9,9

[END OUTPUTS]

Public Accessible Panic Switches

Some applications call for panic switches that are accessible to the public. Panic switches are input devices used to signal a non-fire emergency, and could be used to trigger events and/or announcements in the building. If these switches are installed in public areas of a building they would typically not automatically trigger a Mass Notification event. Instead, they would trigger the Command Center to investigate the signal and make the appropriate announcement.

A variety of devices can be connected to a Simplex 4100ES via an individual addressable module (IAM). The IAM should be programmed as a priority 2 device, or other non-fire alarm point. The IAM may be used to monitor any contact type initiating device. Use a contact-type initiating device listed to ANSI/UL 2017.

The Command Center may also use security cameras and/or intercom capabilities to allow them to make a more rapid response and a Mass Notification announcement if necessary.

10-5

Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Programming and Configuration

Programming the 4100ES to Meet MNS Requirements

The programming for an MNS is not special; it can be accomplished using priority, modes, and Custom Control. Any technician who has attended training and become a certified 4100ES Fire Alarm Technician should be capable of programming the 4100ES for MNS combined with Fire Alarm service.

Program a key for the reset of MNS panic switch alarms. The key mode should be type “PBT”, with the reference address of P216. The adjacent LED should be programmed to track the status of the reset window timer, illuminating for the duration of the reset cycle. The reset window timer is A214.

MNS requires that dedicated LEDs be programmed for any MNS-specific service. It is appropriate to use Priority 2 for MNS alarms. Pri 2 could also be used to indicate another alarm, such as CO. In a case of multiple Pri 2 alarms, LEDs must be added for each type of service. Program these LEDs to track the state of the points involved in that service.

Figure 10-1. Supervisory and Trouble LEDs for both MNS and Fire

MNS can also have Supervisory inputs, which should still be programmed as Supervisory in order to activate the sounder and the Supervisory indicator. A dedicated LED for each type of service must also be programmed. For example, a fire supervisory would light a dedicated fire supervisory LED, as well as the general supervisory LED. An MNS supervisory would light a dedicated MNS supervisory LED as well as the general supervisory LED. This is to comply with a UL2572 requirement for an indication of each type of service without activating any controls.

The same requirement holds when there are MNS specific points. They should light the general trouble LED and sound the piezo. They should also be programmed such that an LED tracks the trouble status of MNS points and a separate LED tracks the trouble status of fire alarm points.

Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU

The minimum configuration for LOC and ACU is listed below.

Table 10-1. Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU

Controls • MNS Reset• MNS Alarm activation• MNS Take Command/Relinquish Command• CO Reset

Indicators • MNS Supervisory LED• MNS Trouble LED• CO Alarm LED• ACU in Control LED• CCS in Control LED• LOC in Control LED

10-6

Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Programming and Configuration, Continued

Access and Security Information for the 4100ES System

Communications Security: Level 1 Stored Data Security: Level 0 Physical Security: Level 1 Access Control: Level 1

Voice Control Centers

The primary solution for controlling and activating voice messages on a Simplex fire alarm network is utilizing the standard 4100ES LED and Switch user interface along with a microphone for live voice announcements.

In the example below the operator first selects the destination for a message on the left and then selects the audio source or pre-recorded message to play on the right.

Figure 10-2. Voice Message Configuration Example

In a system with multiple voice command centers a take control button with an in-control indicator would also be appropriate to configure on your annunciator with microphone.

The 4100ES and 4120 network support a variety of programmable options for utilizing prioritization and request/cancel procedures for taking control of the system. This feature prevents operators from interfering with each other in a system with multiple command centers.

In some cases different colored peripherals or boxes are specified for Mass Notification. Contact sales engineering for information on meeting these requirements.

Configuration Limitations

A 4100ES is not UL Listed for Background Music/General Paging or Security when configured for MNS, because the UL testing did not include these services in the test scope.

Note: The TrueSite Workstation is not listed for UL 2017 operation. The TSW functionality must be limited to remote annunciator active when used for MNS operations.

10-7

Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Programming and Configuration, Continued

Amber Strobes The 4100ES is compatible with the amber strobes listed below:

• 4906-9205, -9206, -9207 (addressable, visible only, “ALERT” lettering)

• 4906-9107, -9108 (non-addressable, visible only, “ALERT” lettering)

• 4906-9208, -9211 (visible only, with both an amber and a clear lens strobe, respectively marked “ALERT” and “FIRE”)

Other models of Simplex brand strobes are available with “ALERT” instead of “FIRE”. Refer to the installation instructions for each power supply for complete lists of compatible appliances.

MNS Wiring The 4100ES field wiring is “power-limited”, with the exception of AC input, battery and the City Circuit option module wiring. For MNS, the term “power limited” has been replaced by the NEC term “class 2”. Wherever this document uses the UL864 term “power limited”, it can be taken to mean class 2. Any wiring deemed “power limited” for UL864 is deemed “class 2” for MNS.

A-1

Appendix A

The Device Configuration DIP Switch

Overview Addressable cards include a bank of eight DIP switches. From left to right (see Figure A-1) these switches are designated as SWx-1 through SWx-8. The function of these switches is as follows:

• SWx-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running between the card and the CPU. Set this switch to ON.

• SWx-2 through SWx-8. These switches set the card’s address within the 4100 FACP. Refer to Table A-1 for a complete list of the switch settings for all of the possible card addresses.

Note: You must set these switches to the value assigned to the card by the ES Panel Programmer.

Figure A-1. DIP Switch SWx

1 8765432

ON

OFF

DIP Switches SWx-2 through SWx-8 set the Card Address. Figure shows an Address of 3.

4100 Comm. Baud Rate. Switch (SWx-1)Must Be Set to ON

A-2

Appendix A

The Service Port

OverviewTable A-1. Card Addresses

Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8

1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON

5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON

7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON

9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON

13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF

14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON

15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF

16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF

18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON

19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON

21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF

22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON

23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF

24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON

25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON

27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON

29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF

30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON

31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON

33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON

37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF

38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON

39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF

40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON

41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF

42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON

43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF

44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON

45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF

46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON

49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF

50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON

51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON

55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON

57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON

59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

B-1

Appendix BInstalling 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)

Introduction 4100 back boxes are available in one, two, and three-bay sizes. Each can be equipped with a solid or glass door. This chapter describes how to mount all types of non-4100ES/4100U back boxes to a wall, and how to mount system electronics bays into the boxes.

This chapter describes every installation procedure that applies directly to the FACP as well as each step of the host panel installation.

Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages to get a sense of the types of bays and modules that make up the FACP.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to FACPs B-2

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes B-8

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes B-10

Step 3. Configuring Modules B-14

Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards B-17

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays B-18

B-2

Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs

Overview 4100 FACPs are back boxes that contain the master controller, operator interface, universal power supply (UPS), backup batteries, and any additional modules that the panel requires. The FACP is the central hub (often referred to as a host panel) of a standalone or MINIPLEX fire alarm system. In a networked system, the FACP can be connected to other system FACPs, so that each host panel is a node on the network.

Master Controller Bay

Every FACP contains a master controller bay. The master controller bay consists of the master controller motherboard, the universal power supply (UPS), the operator interface, and four open motherboard slots.

In a standalone or MINIPLEX system, the master controller motherboard is supplied with a master controller daughter card attached to it. In a networked system, a network interface card is attached as a second daughter card to the master controller motherboard.

Figure B-1 is an illustration the master controller bay.

Figure B-1. Master Controller Bay (4100)

MASTER CONTROLLER MOTHERBOARD

MASTER CONTROLLER DAUGHTER CARD

NETWORK / RS-232 DAUGHTER CARDWITH MEDIA CARD

UNIVERSAL POWER SUPPLY (UPS)OPTIONAL MOTHERBOARDS

B-3

Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

Master Motherboards and Controllers

The 4100 master motherboard and controller is the central memory and control point for the 4100 system. It mounts in the leftmost side of the master controller bay.

The figures below are illustrations of the three types of master controller motherboards. They are commonly referred to as Universal Transponder (UT) motherboards, because they can be used across different types of older Simplex fire alarm systems.

Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.

Figure B-2. UT Motherboard (565-161)

Figure B-3. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-213)

Figure B-4. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)

Continued on next page

MM

OC

1B

T1

1

1J

2P

1P

RESRV

24C

PIEZO

GND

CTS

RCV

1T

RO

PRTS

XMIT

3P

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (J1) 2120 COMM/RS-232

CARD CONNECTOR (J2)

SYSTEM POWER CONNECTOR (P3)

INTERNAL COMMS CONNECTOR (P2)

UT MASTER CONTROLLER

CONNECTOR (J3)

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (P1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL

BLOCK (TB2)

MM

OC

TB1

P5

1

J1 P4

GND4

GND3CITY CONNECT JUMPERS

P2P1

RESRVFRONT

24CPIEZO

NCBACK

CNO

NC+NO-

GNDCTSRCVRTSXMIT

P3P6

JW1 JW1P8

P7

TBL

CITY

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (J3)

2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD CONNECTOR (J1)

SYSTEM POWER CONNECTOR (P3)

INTERNAL COMMS CONNECTOR (P2)

UT MASTER CONTROLLER

CONNECTOR (J2)

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (P1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL

BLOCK (TB2)

CITY CONNECT JUMPERS (P4)

JW2

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (J3)

2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD CONNECTOR (J1)

SYSTEM POWER CONNECTOR (P3)

INTERNAL COMMS CONNECTOR (P2)

UT MASTER CONTROLLER

CONNECTOR (J2)

POWER/COMM BUS CONNECTOR (P1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL

BLOCK (TB1)

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL

BLOCK (TB2)

CITY CONNECT JUMPERS (P4)

RS-232 / NETWORK JUMPERS (P5, P6, JW1)

RS-232 / NETWORK JUMPERS (P7, P8, JW2)

)U 0

014-

no

N (

B-4

Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

Master Motherboards and Controllers

The figures below are illustrations of the two UT master controllers.

Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.

Figure B-5. UT Master Controller (565-333)

Figure B-6. UT Master Controller (565-148)

LED1

P6

P7

P5P3

P2

P1

MODEM

UT MASTERCONTROLLER

565-333 H

P4

SW11 2

PROGRAMMER PORT (P1)

MODEM JUMPER (P2)

BATTERY BACKUP JUMPER (P3)

FLASH EPROM JUMPER (P5)

EDGE CONNECTOR TO 565-161 MOTHERBOARD (P4)

SYSTEM TROUBLE LED (LED1)

MASTER DISPLAY PORT (P6)

RESET BUTTON (SW1)

Not used (P8)

MASTER DISPLAY JUMPER (P7)

LED1

P6

P7

P5P3

P2

P1

MODEM

UT MASTERCONTROLLER

565-333 H

P4

SW1

1 2

PROGRAMMER PORT (P1)

BATTERY BACKUP JUMPER (P2)

FLASH EPROM JUMPER (P3)

EDGE CONNECTOR TO 565-161 MOTHERBOARD (P5, P6))

SYSTEM TROUBLE LED (LED1)

MASTER DISPLAY PORT (P4)

RESET BUTTON (SW1)

B-5

Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

Universal Power Supply (UPS)

The power supply controller card contains the switches and jumpers for configuring the power supply, as shown in Figure B-7.

Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and jumpers.

Figure B-7. Universal Power Supply

“B” TAP OUTPUT (P15)

“C” TAP OUTPUT (P17)

AUDIO CONTROLLER INTERFACE (P8)

COMM PORT (P4)

“A” TAP RETURN (P1)

“B” TAP RETURN (P2)

“C” TAP RETURN (P3)

CURRENT-LIMIT RESISTOR 2 FOR “C” TAP CHARGER OUTPUT (P11)

ADDRESSCONFIGURATION DIP SWITCH (SW2)

UPSCONFIGURATION DIP SWITCH (SW1)

PMSI PORT (P5)

BATTERY/NO BATTERY

JUMPER (P6)

SWITCHERPORT (P9)

“A” TAP OUTPUT (P14)

POWER HARNESS

OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

(TB2)

EARTH DETECT JUMPER (P16)

CURRENT-LIMIT RESISTOR 2 FOR “B” TAP CHARGER OUTPUT (P12)

B-6

Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

Operator Interface Shown below is the operator interface which is available for the 4100. The Operator Interface is used to obtain alarm, supervisory, trouble and other status via the Liquid Crystal Display and LEDs. Control functions are accessed using dedicated keys.

Figure B-8. Operator Interface

Additional CPU Bay Modules

The master controller bay can be equipped with many additional types of modules. The cards listed below are limited to the CPU bay only.

• 4100/4120-0139 Service Modem Card. Master controller mezzanine card: Provides a connection to remote PCs for diagnostics and programming purposes.

• 4100/4120-6014 Modular Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts to the CPU motherboard. Performs 4100 networking operations. May be installed with the 4100-6056 Wired Media Card, the 4100-6057 Fiber Media Card, and/or the 4100-6055 Modem Media Card.

Expansion Bays An FACP always has one master controller bay, and may have one or two expansion bays as well. Expansion bays contain a variety of additional modules that the system might require. Expansion bays are always below the master controller bay.

Figure B-9. Master Controller and Expansion Bays

FIRE

ALARM

SYSTEM

TROUBLE

SIGNALS

SILENCED

POWER

ON

PRIORITY 2

ALARM

SYSTEM

SUPERVISORY

SYSTEM IS NORMAL12:35:15 am MON 29 JAN 96

ACKNOWLEDGE

TBLACK ACK

SUPV ACK ALARMALARM

ACK SILENCE ALARM

RESET SYSTEM

TWO-BAYCABINET

MASTER CONTROLLER BAY

EXPANSION BAY

B-7

Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

System Power The FACP is powered primarily by the universal power supply (UPS), which in turn takes power directly from the AC mains and the two backup batteries.

Figure B-10. Power and Comm Lines

BATTERY BATTERY

UPS

POWERAND

COMM

MASTER CONTROLLER

TO AC MAINS

TO BATTERY

B-8

Appendix B

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes

Overview There are one-bay, two-bay, and three-bay back boxes. The one-bay back box is typically used as a standalone master controller cabinet, while the two and three-bay cabinets may contain any combination of modules.

• Back boxes are usually shipped in large containers separate from the system electronics. If system electronics containers are shipped with the back box containers, store the system electronics containers in a safe, clean, and dry location until the back box installation is completed, and you are ready to install the system electronic bays.

• All back box PIDs are listed in Chapter 1.

Specifications Table B-1 lists the specifications for the back boxes.

Make certain that you have the necessary hardware before you begin the installation procedure. The Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit should have all of the items listed in Table B-2.

Table B-1. Back Box Specifications

PID Number

Description Height Width Rough Opening

Size Weight Box Trim Door Box Height Width

4100-2001/20112975-9190/9191

1 Bay 55 lb.(25 kg)

20-¾ in.(527 mm)

23-½ in.(597 mm)

26-3/8 in.(670 mm)

25-¾ in.(654 mm)

21-¼ in.(540 mm)

26 ¼ in.(667 mm)

4100-2002/20122975-9192/9193

2 Bay 125 lb.(57 kg)

36-¼ in.(921 mm)

39-1/8 in.(994 mm)

26-3/8 in.(670 mm)

25-¾ in.(654 mm)

36-¾ in.(933 mm)

26 ¼ in.(667 mm)

4100-2003/20132975-9194/9195

3 Bay 185 lb.(84 kg)

52-1/8 in.(1,324 mm)

55 in.(1,397 mm)

26-3/8 in.(670 mm)

25-¾ in.(654 mm)

52 5/8 in.(1,337 mm)

26 ¼ in.(667 mm)

Table B-2. Contents of the Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit

Part Number DescriptionQuantity per back box

1-Bay Box 2-Bay Box 3-Bay Box

268-010 Lockwasher (No. 8)

6 8 10

490-011 Washer 6 8 10

426-033 Screw (No. 8 Torx, 5/16 in.)

6 8 10

B-9

Appendix B

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the Back Box(es)

Install the back box as shown in Figure B-11. Use the holes in the back box to secure it to the wall.

• For mounting to a wooden wall structure, the back box must be attached with four 1-½-inch-long (38 mm) lag bolts and four ½-inch-diameter (13 mm) washers.

• The enclosure must be level and plumb when installed. The front surface of the back box must protrude at least three inches from the wall surface for semi-flush back box installations (refer to Table B-1 and the “Rough Opening” section of the table for semi-flush installations).

Figure B-11. Back Box Installation Diagram

Figure Notes:Figure B-11 notes:

1. The dimensions shown are typical for all surface and semi-flush installations.

2. Use a suitable punch when conduit is required and no knockout is present.3. Box mounting:• Minimum 5 inches from an obstruction on the hinged side of the box to permit at least 90 degree

angle when the door is open.• Minimum distance of 3 ¼ inches (83 mm) between boxes.• Maximum distance of 10 inches (254 mm) between boxes.4. Conduit A denotes internal panel interconnect harnesses and non power-limited wiring.

Conduit B denotes contractor wiring.5. Do not install any power-limited wiring in the shaded area of the back box as shown in Figure B-11.

This area is reserved for non power-limited devices and circuits (for example, AC power, batteries, and city circuits). The non power-limited area is determined by the internal barriers, but is always below and to the right of these barriers. Do not use the upper right, right, or bottom knockouts for entrance of power-limited wiring.

6. When the two back boxes are mounted side-by-side, remove the hinge and the lock catch on the second back box (box on the right). Remount the hinges on the right side of the second back box. Remount the lock catch on the left side of the second box. Mount the door upside-down so the locks on both boxes are side-by-side.

B-10

Appendix B

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes

Overview Before the system cards can be configured, the system electronics bays must be mounted to the FACP back boxes. This section describes that process for the master controller cabinet and expansion cabinets.

Installing the System Electronics Bays

The system electronics bays for each back box are mounted on two rails. These rails are secured inside a cardboard shipping container when shipped from the factory.

Perform the following procedure to install the system electronics bays.

1. Remove everything from the electronics shipping container. To remove the 635-852 Battery Terminal Block, unscrew the two 8-2 shipping screws that secure it to the container as shown in Figure B-12. Save the two lockwashers and nuts.

2. Remove the 10-32 shipping studs that secure the vertical rails to the shipping container as shown in Figure B-12.

Figure B-12. Removing the Shipping Studs

Continued on next page

B-11

Appendix B

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the System Electronics Bays

3. Using the hardware provided (as referenced in Table B-2), insert a mounting screw in both the top right and top left track support holes in the back box as shown in Figure B-13.

Figure B-13. Inserting the Mounting Screws

4. Tighten the two mounting screws, but leave a 1/8-inch (3-mm) gap from the seated position of each screw.

5. Using the vertical rails as handles, carefully lift the system electronics bay assembly and the terminal block from the shipping container.

Continued on next page

MOUNTING SCREWS

BACK BOX

B-12

Appendix B

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the System Electronics Bays

6. Install the system electronics bay assembly in the back box by carefully placing the rail teardrop holes, located at the top of the rails, onto the two extended screws in the back box, allowing the electronics bay assembly to hang from the screws. See Figure B-14.

Note: Make sure you do not pinch the terminal block wiring behind the rails as you mount the bay assembly in the back box.

Figure B-14. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly7. Insert the remaining mounting screws through the screw holes in the rails.8. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table B-3 for the recommended torque.

Continued on next page

Table B-3. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware

Screw / Nut Size Recommended Torque

No.6 7.9 to 8.7 inch/ounces(569 to 626 cm/grams)

No.8 16.1 to 17.8 inch/ounces(1,159 to 1,282 cm/grams)

No.10 26.8 to 29.7 inch/ounces(1,930 to 2,139 cm/grams)

TEARDROP HOLES

SYSTEM ELECTRONICS

BAY ASSEMBLY

BACK BOX

TERMINAL BLOCK

LOCKWASHER

NUT

SCREW HOLES

PREMOUNTED SCREWS

B-13

Appendix B

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the System Electronics Bays

9. Place the 635-852 terminal block on the two mounting studs on the right side of the back box as shown in Figure B-14.

10. Secure the 635-852 Terminal Block using the two lockwashers and nuts that you set aside in step 1. Use the torque recommendations listed in Table B-3 when securing the terminal block.

At this point, the system is ready for system card installation.

CAUTION: Do not apply power to the system at this time.

For more detailed system installation instructions, refer to one of the following publications:

• 4100+/4120/UT System Cards Installation Instructions: FA4-21-305 (574-038)

• 4100+ Contractor Installation Instructions: FA4-21-202 (574-019)

• UT Contractor Installation Instructions: FA4-21-300 (574-901)

B-14

Appendix B

Step 3. Configuring Modules

Overview The master controller, UPS, and all other modules to be mounted in the FACP back boxes must be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. This section describes the hardware configuration for the master controller and UPS, since they will always be used in the master controller bay.

Master Motherboard Configuration

The following settings apply to the master motherboard.

P4. City Connect jumpers.

• Local Energy: install jumpers 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, and 13.

• Reverse Polarity: install jumpers 1, 3, 7, 8, and 12.

• Shunt: install jumpers 1, 5, and 13.

• Form C: install jumper 13.

P5-P8, JW1, JW2. (565-274, 565-213 only) Used to enable RS-232/DC Comms or 4120 Network operation.

• If RS-232/DC Comms card is used on the motherboard: install jumpers P5, P6, P7, and P8.

• If a 4120 Network board is used on the motherboard: install jumpers JW1 and JW2.

565-333 Master Controller Configuration

If the 565-333 Master Controller is being used, use the jumper settings described below.

P2. Controls whether software downloads to the programmer port (P1) or to a service modem.

• Position 1 – 2: Use port P1.

• Position 2 – 3: Use the service modem.

P3. Controls whether RAM battery backup is enabled.

• Position 1 – 2: Enable RAM battery backup.

• Position 2 – 3: Disable RAM battery backup.

P5. Controls whether Flash EPROM writes are enabled.

• Position 1 – 2: Enable Flash EPROM writes.

• Position 2 – 3: Disable Flash EPROM writes.

P7. Makes the card compatible with a given master display.

• Position 1 – 2: Makes the card compatible with the 565-331 Master Display (5 V LCD). Note that Rev B1 of the 565-331 Master Display will not work with this setting.

• Position 2 – 3: Makes the card compatible with the 565-173 and 565-331 Rev B1 Master Displays (12 V LCD).

B-15

Appendix B

Step 3. Configuring Modules (continued)

565-148 Master Controller Configuration

If the 565-148 Master Controller is being used, use the jumper settings described below.

P2. Controls whether RAM battery backup is enabled.

• Position 1 – 2: Enable RAM battery backup.

• Position 2 – 3: Disable RAM battery backup.

P3. Controls whether Flash EPROM writes are enabled.

• Position 1 – 2: Enable Flash EPROM writes.

• Position 2 – 3: Disable Flash EPROM writes.

UPS Configuration

Note: ON = 0; OFF = 1.

DIP Switch SW1. Controls various UPS functions.

SW1-1. Set to 0. Used when the UPS must be retrofitted to for Intelligent Power Supply capabilities.

• Position 0: UPS acts like an Intelligent Power Supply in terms of messages sent to and received from the master controller.

• Position 1: UPS does not use Intelligent Power Supply functionality at all.

SW1-2. Set to 1 unless UPS B-tap is providing power to a 25-Watt Amplifier. Controls how the amplifier uses the backup battery.

• Position 0: Amplifier switches to battery backup when told to do so by the master controller.

• Position 1: Amplifier switches to battery backup upon loss of AC power.

SW1-3 through SW1-6. These switches work together to configure the UPS for different types of batteries (or no batteries at all). Refer to Table B-4 to determine what settings should be used.

Continued on next page

IMPORTANT: Always configure the UPS as described below.

Table B-4. UPS SW1 Battery Configurations

DIP Switch Position UPS Configuration

3 4 5 6

1 0 0 1 Lead-acid battery

1 0 1 0 No battery charger

1 1 0 1 Audio (25 W Amp) and lead-acid battery

1 1 1 0 Audio (25 W Amp) without battery charger

1 0 0 0 NICAD battery

1 1 0 0 Audio (25 W Amp) and NICAD battery

B-16

Appendix B

Step 3. Configuring Modules (continued)

UPS Configuration

SW1-7. Controls battery charging current.

• Position 0: 50 Ah battery charging.

• Position 1: 110 Ah battery charging.

SW1-8. Not used.

DIP Switch SW2. Device address DIP switch. See Appendix A for details.

Use the following jumper settings to continue configuring the UPS.

P6. Battery backup configuration.

• Position 1 – 2: Normal configuration (battery backup).

• Position 2 – 3: No battery backup.

P7. Amplifier shutdown selection.

• Position 1 – 2: Tap A shutdown enabled.

• Position 3 – 4: Tap B shutdown enabled.

• Position 5 – 6: Tap C shutdown enabled.

P16. Controls Earth Detect configuration.

• Position 1 – 2: Enable Earth Detect.

• Position 2 – 3: Disable Earth Detect.

Note: Jumpers P10, P13, and JW1 through JW7 are not field adjustable.

Configuring Other Cards

Refer to 4100/4100+ Fire Alarm Universal Transponder (UT) Service Instructions (FA4-51-207) to configure other cards that are located in master controller bays and expansion bays.

IMPORTANT: Do not use jumper P6 to bypass troubles from a temporarily disconnected battery.

B-17

Appendix B

Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards

Overview Each card has to be interconnected with every other card in the master controller bay. Read this section to ensure that cards are interconnected.

Interconnecting Cards

Use the following instructions and Figure B-15 to interconnect master controller bay cards.

1. Use the 733-659 Harness to connect P14 on the UPS to P3 on the master controller motherboard. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

2. Use 733-672 Harness to connect P4 on the UPS to P2 on the master controller motherboard. Like the P2 connector, P3 has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins.

3. If you are installing a new motherboard, orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.

4. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard.

5. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

Figure B-15. Master Controller Bay Interconnections

IMPORTANT: The leftmost board must always be the master controller motherboard.

UPS

P14

P4

P2

P3J1 or J3

P1

733-659

733-672

B-18

Appendix B

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays

Overview This section describes how to interconnect motherboards in expansion bays, and how to connect the expansion bays electrically to the master controller bay.

Guidelines Up to eight 2 (51 mm) x 11 ½-inch (292 mm) motherboards can be installed in an expansion bay. Adhere to the following guidelines when installing a motherboard in an expansion bay:

• If a power supply is installed, it must be placed on the far right of the bay.

• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots (just left of the power supply, if there is one). This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.

• If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT is installed in the bay, it must be installed in the far left or far right slot. Neither of these modules contains the J1 or P1 connectors, which are used to distribute power and communications to adjacent modules.

Installing Motherboards

Use the following directions and Figure B-16 to install a motherboard into an expansion bay.

1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.

2. Match the connector on the previously installed motherboard with the pins on the mother-board you are installing. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard. If you are installing the leftmost board, the pins will remain unconnected.

3. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

Figure B-16. Installing the Motherboard in an Expansion Bay

4. If you are installing the leftmost motherboard, connect a 733-525 Power and Communication Harness. Continue to the next topic to connect the harness.

The motherboard can be installed in any of the eight slots.

J1 or J3

P1

B-19

Appendix B

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays (continued)

Connecting the 733-525 Harness

If you need to connect a 733-525 Harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure B-17 and follow these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.

1. Connect one end of the harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay.

If the adjacent bay is a master controller bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the master controller motherboard and continue to step 2.

If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the motherboard in the second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:

a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Continued on next page

B-20

Appendix B

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays (continued)

Connecting the 733-525 Harness

2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.

a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Figure B-17. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards

Connector with Blue Wire Goes

to P2 (Blue = Top)

Connector with White Wire Goes

to P3(White = Top)

733-525 Harness

733-659 Harness

733-672 Harness

C-1

Appendix C Installing 4100 MINIPLEX Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)

Introduction MINIPLEX remote interface cards (RICs) allow for data and power interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. This chapter describes the transponder installation procedure for all MINIPLEX systems in non-4100ES/4100U systems.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems C-2

MINIPLEX System Components C-4

MINIPLEX System Guidelines C-6

Installing Modules into Back Boxes C-7

MINIPLEX Wiring C-11

C-2

Appendix C

Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems

Overview The 4100 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm System uses transponder cabinets containing remote interface cards (RICs) to extend power and communication across large areas. MINIPLEX transponders allow the system to provide applications for up to 1000 monitor and/or control points and 2000 annunciator points (see note). Using 4100-style serial communications, up to 31 distributed MINIPLEX transponder locations are possible for initiating device circuit cards, MAPNET II/ TrueAlarm addressable communications interfaces, notification appliance circuit cards, LED/switch controls, auxiliary relay control cards, power supplies, and audio amplifiers.

By selecting the required combinations of modules and mounting MINIPLEX transponders at the appropriate building locations, wire quantities are significantly reduced for all monitor and control functions. Since power for the local modules is provided from the local power supply, the wiring from the control panel need only be separate twisted, shielded pairs for data, voice, and telephone.

Notes: • One point consists of one LED or one switch on an LED/switch module, one LED driver output on a

graphic driver, or one switch input on a graphic switch input module.• Up to 32 modules can be controlled by one MINIPLEX transponder.• The 4100 0117 MINIPLEX Expansion Power Supply is available with a power-limited 8 A output.

Continued on next page

C-3

Appendix C

Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems (continued)

Overview Figure C-1 is an outline of a MINIPLEX system.

Figure C-1. MINIPLEX System Design

Seventh floor

Sixth floor

Fifth floor

Fourth floor

Third floor

Second floor

First floor

Speaker NAC

TrueAlarm sensorsand MAPNET IIaddressable circuits

RUI communicationswiring, twisted,shielded pair

Audio riser wiring,twisted pair

Legend:

MINIPLEX transponderwith solid door

MINIPLEX transponder withLED/switch modules on door panel

FACP

ACKNOWLEDGE

Seventh floor

Sixth floor

Fifth floor

Fourth floor

Third floor

Second floor

First floor

Speaker NAC

TrueAlarm sensorsand MAPNET IIaddressable circuits

RUI communicationswiring, twisted pair

Audio riser wiring,twisted pair

Legend:

MINIPLEX transponderwith solid door

MINIPLEX transponder withLED/switch modules on door panel

FACP

ACKNOWLEDGE

C-4

Appendix C

MINIPLEX System Components

Overview The 4100 MINIPLEX system is comprised of a host panel containing everything required in a standalone cabinet (see Chapter 3), plus:

• An RUI module in the master controller bay

• One or more remote MINIPLEX transponder cabinets

• A RIC II card in each transponder cabinet

This section describes each component in turn.

The RUI Card The RUI module consists of a motherboard and daughter card, which are used in the master controller bay of a MINIPLEX system to extend the length of communications wire to reach remote bays.

Figure C-2 is an illustration of the RUI card.

Figure C-2. The Remote Unit Interface Card

The RUI card mounts onto a 562-799 or 562-856 Motherboard.

Transponder Cabinets

Communication wiring from the RUI module in the host panel extends to the RIC II card in a remote transponder cabinet. The transponder cabinet is simply a 2975-91xx Back Box with a RIC II module in it, and can have one, two, or three bays.

C-5

Appendix C

MINIPLEX System Components (continued)

The Remote Interface Card (RIC)

Remote interface cards (RICs) in the transponder cabinets allow for data, power, and audio interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. They support RUI connections in Style 4 and Style 7 wiring configurations.

Figure C-3 illustrates the RIC circuit board.

Figure C-3. The RIC II Card

TB2 LED1

TBL+COMMPRIM

+COMMPRIM

-COMM

-COMM

+COMM

+COMM

24C

24C

PIEZOCTRLLEDCTRL

PTT+

PTT-

SHLD

GRN

CIM

WHT

COMMS TROUBLE LED (LED 1): Lights if there is a line short on either primary or secondary lines, or if both comms inputs are absent.

POWER/COMM TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1)

HEADER CONNECTOR (J1)

SEC

+24 V

+24 V

8

1

PIEZO/MICROPHONE TERMINAL BLOCK (TB2)

REMOTE MICROPHONE CONNECTOR (P1)

C-6

Appendix C

MINIPLEX System Guidelines

Overview The rules on this page apply exclusively to MINIPLEX systems. Review each guideline before installing a MINIPLEX 4100 system.

Guidelines • The MINIPLEX master control panel must be a 4100-8210 Voice and Sound Control Panel.

• The Style 4 RUI card supports MINIPLEX transponders and 4602/4603 serial annunciators on the same signaling line circuit.

• Up to 4 RUI cards in the 4100 Control Panel can be used for distributing transponder wiring in different directions or for supporting different wiring requirements (such as using a Style 7 RUI for serial annunciators).

• Up to 31 MINIPLEX transponders can be controlled from the 4100 Control Panel, and can be distributed as required among the RUI cards.

• “T” tapping is allowed for Style 4 communications only (Style 7 wiring does not support “T” tapping).

• *Wiring from RUI cards is a minimum of 18 AWG twisted, shielded pair.

• The maximum wiring distance from the 4100 RUI card to a MINIPLEX transponder is 2500 feet (762 m). For Style 4 wiring, this can be extended to 10,000 feet (3 km) maximum if “T” tapping is used.

• Voice and telephone wiring for 4100-8210 systems is via separate twisted, shielded pairs.

• 4100U system cards are not compatible with 4100 miniplex transponders that are controlled by a 4100 RIC II card.

*The RUI+ has the same limitation as the RUI, except shielded wire is not required.

C-7

Appendix C

Installing Modules into Back Boxes

Overview This section contains guidelines and instructions for mounting the RUI and RIC II modules into 4100 back boxes.

• The RUI motherboard mounts into the CPU bay or, if necessary, an expansion bay.

• The RIC II mounts into expansion bays only.

Guidelines Review the following guidelines before installing a motherboard into a cabinet.

• If a power supply is installed in the bay, it must be installed on the far right of the bay and any relay modules must be installed in the slots immediately to its left.

• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots. This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.

Installing the RUI Motherboard

Mount the RUI motherboard (562-799 or 562-856) in a master controller bay as described below.

1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.

2. Match the connector on the previously installed motherboard with the pins on the mother-board you are installing. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard. If you are installing the leftmost board, the pins will remain unconnected.

3. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

Figure C-4. Installing the RUI Motherboard in the CPU Bay

Note: RUI motherboards may also be installed in expansion bays.

C-8

Appendix C

Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the RIC II Motherboard

The RIC II motherboard is installed into a remote transponder cabinet (back box PID series 2975-91xx). Review the following guidelines before mounting RIC II motherboard.

• If a power supply is installed in the bay, it must be installed on the far right of the bay and any relay modules must be installed in the slots immediately to its left.

• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots. This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.

• If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT is installed in the bay, it must be installed in the far left or far right slot. Neither of these modules contains the J1 or P1 connectors, which are used to distribute power and communications to adjacent modules.

Use the following directions and Figure C-5 to install a RIC II motherboard into a transponder cabinet.

1. The RIC II motherboard must be installed in the leftmost slot. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right.

2. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

Figure C-5. Installing the RIC II Motherboard into a 4100 Expansion Bay

3. If you are installing the RIC II in a transponder cabinet with additional bays, you must connect a 733-525 Power and Communication Harness. Continue to the next topic for instructions.

The RIC II motherboard must be installed in the leftmost slot.

RIC II

J1

C-9

Appendix C

Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)

Connecting the 733-525 Harness

If you need to connect a 733-525 Harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure C-6 and follow these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.

1. Connect one end of the harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay.

If the adjacent bay is a master controller bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the master controller motherboard and continue to step 2.

If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the motherboard in the second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:

a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Continued on next page

C-10

Appendix C

Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)

Connecting the 733-525 Harness

2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.

a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Figure C-6. Power and Communication Wiring for the Transponder Cabinet (4100)

Connector with Blue Wire Goes to P2

Connector with White Wire Goes to P3

733-525 Harness

RIC II (565-233)

733-672 Harness

TO 24 VDC

(OPTIONAL) UNIVERSAL

POWER SUPPLY

C-11

Appendix C

MINIPLEX Wiring

Overview The RIC must be connected to the host panel via RUI cabling. This section explains how to wire the two together, and how to set up a system with multiple transponders connected to the same host panel.

Wiring Configurations

RUI cabling can be accomplished either through Class A or Class B wiring.

Class A wiring allows transponder cabinets to communicate with the FACP even in the event of an open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed from the CPU motherboard to each RIC, and then back again to the CPU motherboard.

Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation than Class A. Additionally, Class B wiring does not require end-of-line resistors, because each RIC communicates directly to the CPU.

• All transponder cabinets are installed within 2500 feet (762 m) of the FACP.

• Conductors test free of all grounds.

• All wires are between 12 and 18 AWG, or as the local code dictates.

Class A Wiring To connect the RUI card to RICs using Class A wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure C-7, on the next page.

1. Route wire between 12 and 18 AWG from the + (TB1-8) and - (TB1-6) terminals on the COMMS “A” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card to the TB1-8 (+) and TB1-6 (-) terminals on the 565-233 RIC.

2. Route wire from the first RIC to the next one. Repeat for each transponder cabinet within 2500 feet (762 m).

3. Route wire from TB1-7 (+) and TB1-5 (-) on the last RIC to + (TB1-4) and - (TB1-2) on the COMMS “B” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card.

Class B Wiring To connect the RUI card to RIC II cards using Class B wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure C-7, on the next page.

1. Route wire between 12 and 18 AWG from the + (TB1-8) and - (TB1-6) terminals on the COMMS “A” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card to the TB1-8 (+) and TB1-6 (-) terminals on the 565-233 RIC.

2. Route wire from the first RIC to the next one. Repeat for each transponder cabinet within 2500 feet (762 m).

IMPORTANT: Make sure these prerequisites are accounted for before wiring:

C-12

Appendix C

MINIPLEX Wiring (continued)

Wiring Illustration Figure C-7 illustrates Class A and Class B wiring.

Figure C-7. MINIPLEX Wiring

Notes:1. Power wiring is not shown. Connect the RIC II card to the UPS or expansion power supply in the tran-

sponder cabinet.2. If a UPS is not provided in the transponder cabinet, then 24 VDC must be provided from the host panel.3. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.4. All wiring is supervised and power limited.

4100 MINIPLEX MASTER

RIC 11565-233

MINIPLEXTRANSPONDER

562-856 W/565-217

COMMS "A"

8 1

COMMS "B"

RUI

TB1 T

B1

RIC 11565-233

MINIPLEXTRANSPONDER

8 1

TB1

CLASS ACLASS B

+24 V24 C

SeeNote 1

II II

D-1

Appendix DChecking System Wiring

Overview This appendix contains instructions on how to use a volt/ohm meter to check system wiring.

Using the Volt/ Ohm Meter

When using the volt/ohm meter to check each circuit, make sure to adhere to the notes and instructions below.

Note:

• Ensure that no power is applied to the 4100 fire alarm panel and that all wiring is properly connected (terminal blocks, LED/switch module ribbon cables, etc.).

• Use the green grounding lug in the control panel for all measurements to ground. • Each circuit must test free of all grounds and extraneous (stray) voltages.• If there are problems removing all power from the fire alarm system, there is an alternate method of

testing for stray voltage. The wires may be lifted from the panel and terminated with appropriate resistors. Use 3.3 Kohms across conductor pairs and 50 Kohms from any conductor under test to ground. All conductors must read less than 1.0V AC or DC.

Use the volt/ohm meter as described in the steps below to check each circuit type.

1. At the control panel, locate wires from each initiating device or indicating appliance circuit.

2. Check each circuit for extraneous voltage by setting the volt/ohm meter to AC. Place the meter probes so that the black probe is on the “-” wire and the red probe is on the “+” wire. Meter readings must show less than 1.0 VAC.

3. Set the volt/ohm meter to DC and repeat step 2. The meter must read less than 1.0 VDC.4. Test all conductors for voltage to ground. The meter must read no more than 1.0V AC or

DC.5. Set the volt/ohm meter to OHMS and place the meter probes as described in step 2. Check

the circuits using the resistance measurements in Table D-1. Locate and correct any abnormal conditions at this time.

Note: If the reading indicates an open circuit in an initiating circuit, make sure the smoke detector heads are properly mounted and seated. The circuit may be open if smoke detector power is not present, and if separately powered 4-wire devices are used.

6. Check all other system wiring to verify that each circuit is free of grounds and extraneous voltages.

D-2

Appendix D

Checking System Wiring

Meter Readings Table D-1 lists the correct meter readings for indicating appliances and initiating devices.

Table D-1. Acceptable Zone and Signal Circuit Meter Readings

Circuit Type Meter Reading

Class B/Style B Initiating Device (Zone) Circuit

From zone + to zone – (each zone) 3.3 K Ohms

From zone + to ground Infinity

From zone - to ground Infinity

Class A/Style D Initiating Device (Zone) Circuit

From zone + to zone – (each zone) Infinity

From zone + to ground Infinity

From zone - to ground Infinity

From zone + OUT to + IN Less than 25 Ohms

From zone - OUT to - IN Less than 25 Ohms

Class B/Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit (each signal circuit)

From + to ground Infinity

From - to ground Infinity

Resistance across circuit:In one directionIn opposite direction

10 K OhmsLess than 200 Ohms

Class A/Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit (each signal circuit)

From + to ground Infinity

From - to ground Infinity

From zone + OUT to + IN Less than 50 Ohms

From zone - OUT to - IN Less than 50 Ohms

Resistance across circuit:In one directionIn opposite direction

InfinityLess than 200 Ohms

Shielding

Shield to ground Infinity

Shield to - Infinity

Shield to + Infinity

MAPNET II Loops (ZAMs and IAMs)

From MAPNET II + to ground Infinity

From MAPNET II - to ground Infinity

E-1

Appendix E

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions

Overview

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions

PID Description Installation Instructions

4100-0156 8V DC CONVERTER 574-123

4100-0620 TRANSPONDER IF MODULE 574-8484100-0621 ANALOG AUDIO RISER MODULE 574-848

4100-0622 DIGITAL AUDIO RISER MODULE 574-848

4100-0623 NETWORK AUDIO I/F MODULE 574-8484100-0625 LOCAL MODE TPR IF 574-848

4100-0632 UTILITY BLOC, 16 TERMINALS 579-248

4100-0633 TRANSPONDER TAMPER SWITCH 579-1954100-0634 POWER DIST MODULE 120V 574-848

4100-0635 POWER DIST MODULE 220V 574-848

4100-1210 ANALOG AUDIO CONTROLLER 579-1594100-1240 AUX AUDIO INPUT MODULE 579-160

4100-1241 MESSAGE EXPANSION, 8 MINUTES 579-172

4100-1242 MESSAGE EXPANSION, 32 MINUTES 579-1724100-1245 FLEX 50 NAC EXPANSION, 3 CLS B 579-175

4100-1246 FLEX 50 CLASS A ADAPTER 579-175

4100-1248 100W NAC EXPANSION, 6 CLASS B 579-1754100-1249 100W CLASS A ADAPTER 579-175

4100-1252 AUDIO IF MODULE, SGL CHANNEL 579-168

4100-1253 AUDIO IF MODULE MULTI-CHANNEL 579-1684100-1254 AUDIO IF 2 CHANNEL 579-168

4100-1255 AUDIO IF 3-8 CHANNEL 579-168

4100-1259 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B 579-5154100-1259 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B -

Non-Alarm Audio Mode579-515

4100-1260 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 70V RMS A/B 579-515

4100-1260 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 70V RMS A/B - Non-Alarm Audio Mode

579-515

4100-1265 FAIL SAFE MICROPHONE MASTER 579-571

4100-1266 EXPANSION NAC CARD FOR EXP SIG 579-1754100-1267 EXP SIG CARD CLASS A 579-175

4100-1268 EXP SIGCARD CONSTANT SUPV 579-515

4100-1269 FAIL SAFE MICROPHONE SLAVE 579-571

4100-1270 MASTER TELEPHONE, 3 NACS 579-2264100-1271 REMOTE MASTER PHONE 579-226

4100-1272 EXPANSION PHONE CONTROLLER 579-226

4100-1273 PHONE CLASS A NAC ADAPTER 579-2264100-1274 MICROPHONE MUX MODULE 579-879

4100-1276 8 RED PLUGGABLE LED MODULE 574-843

4100-1277 16 RED/YEL PLUGGABLE LED MOD 574-8434100-1278 16 SW/16 RED/YEL PLUG LED 574-843

4100-1279 2” BLANK DISPLAY MODULE 574-843

4100-1280 8 SWITCH, 8 RED LED MODULE 574-843

E-2

Appendix E

4100-1281 8 SWITCH, 8 YELLOW LED MODULE 574-8434100-1282 8 SW, 16RED/YEL LED MOUDLE 574-843

4100-1283 8 SWITCH, 16 YELLOW LED MODULE 574-843

4100-1284 8 SW, 16 RED/GREEN LED MODULE 574-843

4100-1285 16 SWITCH, 16 RED LED MODULE 574-8434100-1286 HOA MODULE 24SWI/24RED LED 574-843

4100-1287 24 SWITCH, 24 RED LED MODULE 574-843

4100-1288 64/64 LED/SWITCH CONTROLLER 574-8434100-1289 EXPANSION 64/64 LED/SW MODULE 574-843

4100-1290 24 POINT I/O MODULE 579-183

4100-1291 REMOTE UNIT INTERFACE (RUI) 579-2134100-1292 REM PANEL MOUNT LCD ANUCIATOR (Backlight On) 579-265

4100-1292 REM PANEL MOUNT LCD ANUCIATOR (Backlight Off) 579-265

4100-1293 PANEL MOUNT PRINTER 579-2494100-1295 HOA MODULE,NO TEXT,24SW/24LED 574-843

4100-1296 8 SW, 16 GREEN/ YELLOW LED MOD. 574-843

4100-1297 TFX PHONE CARD 579-8624100-1298 4100U/4100ES MASTER FIREFIGHTER PHONE ASSEMBLY w/TFX Phone Card 579-862

4100-1311 AUDIO CONTROL BOARD - DIGITAL 579-159

4100-1312 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 25V 579-1734100-1313 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 70V 579-173

4100-1314 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 25V 579-174

4100-1315 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 70V 579-1744100-1316 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V-CAN 579-174

4100-1317 100W AMP,6NAC, 120VAC, 70V-CAN 579-174

4100-1318 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,25V 579-1744100-1319 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,70V 579-174

4100-1320 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 25V 579-174

4100-1321 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 70V 579-1744100-1322 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 25V-C 579-174

4100-1323 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 70V-C 579-174

4100-1324 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,25V 579-1744100-1325 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,70V 579-174

4100-1311 AUDIO CONTROL BOARD - DIGITAL 579-159

4100-1312 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 25V 579-1734100-1313 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 70V 579-173

4100-1314 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 25V 579-174

4100-1315 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 70V 579-1744100-1316 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V-CAN 579-174

4100-1317 100W AMP,6NAC, 120VAC, 70V-CAN 579-174

4100-1318 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,25V 579-174

4100-1319 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,70V 579-1744100-1320 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 25V 579-174

4100-1321 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 70V 579-174

4100-1322 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 25V-C 579-1744100-1323 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 70V-C 579-174

4100-1324 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,25V 579-174

4100-1325 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,70V 579-174

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation Instructions

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions

E-3

Appendix E

4100-1326 FLEX 50W AMP W/3 NACS - 25V 579-1734100-1327 FLEX 50W AMP W/3 NACS - 70V 579-173

4100-1328 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V 579-174

4100-1329 DIG. 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,70V 579-174

4100-1330 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC, 25V-C 579-1744100-1331 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,70V-C 579-174

4100-1332 DIG100W AMP,6NAC,220VAC,25V 579-174

4100-1333 DIG100W AMP,6NAC,220VAC,70V 579-1744100-1334 BACKUP DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,25V 579-174

4100-1335 BACKUP DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,70V 579-174

4100-1336 BACK DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,25V-C 579-1744100-1337 BACK DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,70V-C 579-174

4100-1338 BCK DIG.100W AMP,220VAC,25V 579-174

4100-1339 BCK DIG.100W AMP,220VAC,70V 579-1744100-1340 4100U/4100ES TFX AUDIO INTERFACE MODULE 579-815

4100-1361 FLEX 35W AMP W/3 NACS - 25V 579-173

4100-1341 Multiple Command Center Digital Audio Riser module 574-8444100-1362 FLEX 35W AMP W/3 NACS - 70V 579-173

4100-1363 DIGITALFLEX 35W AMP, 3NACS-25V 579-173

4100-1364 DIGITALFLEX 35W AMP, 3NACS-70V 579-1734100-3101 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS- Each IDNet Device (Add to

IDNet current) 4100-3101 with full channel - 250 IDNet devices574-800

4100-3102 MAPNET MODULE, UP TO 127 PTSEach MAPNET Device (Add to MAPNET current) 4100-3102 with full channel - 127 MAPNET devices

579-222

4100-3103 MAPNET/IDNET ISOLATOR MODULE 579-5144100-3104 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 127 POINTS 574-800

4100-3105 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 64 POINTS 574-800

4100-3106 IDNET MODULE QUICK CONNECT 2 574-8004100-3107 IDNET+ MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS

Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet+ current)579-786

4100-3108 IDNet1+ MODULE 579-1014

4100-3109 IDNET 2 MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS - Two Isolated Loops per IDNet Device (Add to IDNet Current)

579-1169

4100-3110 IDNET 2+2 MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS - Four Isolated Loops per IDNet Device (Add to IDNet Current)

579-1169

4100-3115 XA LOOP INTERFACE CARD (Master) 579-513

4100-3115 XA LOOP INTERFACE CARD (Slave) 579-5134100-3202 4 RELAYS, 10 AMP CONTACTS 579-220

4100-3204 4 POINT 2 AMP AUX RELAY MODULE 579-220

4100-3206 8 POINT 3 AMP AUX RELAY MODULE 579-2204100-5005 ZONE MODULE, 8 IDC, CLASS B 579-205

4100-5015 ZONE MODULE, 8 IDC, CLASS A 579-205

4100-5101 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, 120VAC 574-772

4100-5102 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220VAC 574-7724100-5103 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, CANADA 574-772

4100-5111 X SPS PWR, IDNET, 3 NACS, 120V Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current)

574-246

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation Instructions

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

E-4

Appendix E

4100-5112 SPS POWER,3 NACS,120VAC CANEach IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current)

574-246

4100-5113 SPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220/240VEach IDNet Device (Add to IDNet+ current)

574-246

4100-5115 XPS EXPANSION MODULE, 3 NACS 574-772

4100-5116 EXPANSION AUDIO SIGNAL CARD 579-5164100-5120 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS, 120VAC 579-336

4100-5121 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS,CAN 579-336

4100-5122 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS, 240VAC 579-3364100-5124 TPS CLASS A ADAPTER MOD 579-337

4100-5125 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, 120VAC 574-246

4100-5126 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, CANADIAN 574-2464100-5127 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220VAC 574-246

4100-5128 BATTERY DIST TERM MODULE 579-332

4100-5130 4100U/4100ES TFX Voltage Regulator Module 579-8124100-5152 POWER MODULE, 2A, 12 VOLTS 579-218

4100-5311 EPS POWER, 120V with IDNet 2 Card 579-1015

4100-5313 EPS POWER, 240V with IDNet 2 Card 579-10154100-5325 EPS POWER, 120V 579-1015

4100-5327 EPS POWER, 240V 579-1015

4100-6014 NETWORK IFC CARD, MODULAR 579-1824100-6029 SMOKE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION GUIDE 574-465

4100-6030 SERVICE MODEM (566-276) 579-194

4100-6031 CITY MODULE W/DISCONNECT 574-8394100-6032 CITY MODULE W/O DISCONNECT 574-839

4100-6033 ALARM RELAY 574-839

4100-6034 TAMPER SWITCH W/IDNET IAM 574-1954100-6036 PHYSICAL BRIDGE, STYLE 4 579-184

4100-6037 PHYSICAL BRIDGE, STYLE 7 579-184

4100-6038 DUAL RS-232 IF CARD 579-2214100-6045 DECODER MODULE 574-037

4100-6047 BUILDING NETWORK INTERFACE CARD 579-949

4100-6048 VESDA INTERFACE KIT 574-0504100-6052 EVENT REPORTING DACT 574-836

4100-6055 DIAL-IN SERVICE MODEM (566-338) 574-046

4100-6056 NETWORK MEDIA CARD WIRED 579-1824100-6057 NETWORK MEDIA CARD F/OPTIC 579-182

4100-6060 SAFELINC FP INTERNET INTERFACE 579-349

4100-6061 MODULAR NIC, REDUNDANT 579-3314100-6062 TFX NETWORK INTERFACE 579-575

4100-6063 FIBER OPTIC MODEM LEFT PORT 579-581

4100-6064 FIBER OPTIC MODEM RIGHT PORT 579-581

4100-6066 4100U/4100ES TFX Addressable Loop Interface Card 579-8114100-6069 BACpac Ethernet 579-842

4100-6080 DACT SIDE MOUNTED 574-836

4100-7150 MASTER UPGRADE, 2X40 LCD 579-2294100-7151 MASTER UPGRADE, NO DISPLAY 574-918

4100-7152 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE, W/ DSPLY 579-229

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation Instructions

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

E-5

Appendix E

4100-7153 FP UPGRADE W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-2294100-7154 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE W/Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-229

4100-7155 FP UPGRADE W/ Flexible User Interface, INTERNATIONAL 579-229

4100-7156 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE W/Flexible User Interface, INTERNATIONAL 579-229

4100-7158 NXP Master Controller Upgrade w/o Display (Legacy 4100 to Rev 13 or higher)

579-943

4907-9001 TrueAlert Text Messaging Appliance 579-8294100-9111 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 250 Devices 574-848

4100-9111 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 0 Devices 574-848

4100-9112 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices 574-8484100-9113 PRECONF, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices 574-848

4100-9114 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface DOMESTIC 120V; 0 Devices

574-848

4100-9115 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices

574-848

4100-9116 PRECONF W/ Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices

574-848

4100-9121 4100U/4100ES Preconfig.REDUNDANT 120V 579-331

4100-9122 4100U/4100ES Preconfig. w/ Flexible User Interface REDUNDANT 120V 579-3314100-9131 MASTER CONTROLLER NO DISPLAY 574-848

4100-9132 MSTR CANADIAN ENG. NO DISPLAY 574-848

4100-9133 MSTR CANADIAN FRENCH w/o UI 574-9184100-9141 NETWORK DISPLAY UNIT, DOMESTIC 579-269

4100-9142 NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC 579-269

4100-9143 NDU CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-2694100-9144 NDU CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269

4100-9145 NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269

4100-9146 NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-2694100-9151 NDU W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-269

4100-9152 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-269

4100-9153 NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-2694100-9154 NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269

4100-9155 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269

4100-9156 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-2694100-9211 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/DISPLAY (230V) 574-848

4100-9212 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (230V) 574-848

4100-9214 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface, CHINA (230V) 574-8484100-9213 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (120V) 574-848

4100-9222 Redundant Mstr w/ Flexible User Interface International (230V) 579-269

4100-9230 MSTR INTERNATIONAL NO DISPLAY (230V) 574-8484100-9241 NDU INTERNATIONAL 579-269

4100-9242 NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL 579-269

4100-9243 NDU W/Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269

4100-9244 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-2694100-9245 NDU w/ Flexible User Interface International (120V) 579-269

4100-9246 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269

4100-9311 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 250 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation Instructions

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

E-6

Appendix E

4100-9312 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9313 PRECONF, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9314 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface DOMESTIC 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9315 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9316 PRECONF W/ Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9131 MASTER CONTROLLER NO DISPLAY, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848

4100-9332 MSTR CANADIAN ENG. NO DISPLAY, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-8484100-9342 NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 579-269

4100-9352 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

579-269

4100-9355 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

579-269

4100-9401 Remote Display Assembly w/ Flexible User Interface, RED, DOMESTIC 579-687

4100-9402 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, DOMESTIC 579-6874100-9421 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, RED, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-687

4100-9422 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-687

4100-9441 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, RED, INTERNATIONAL 579-6874100-9442 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, INTERNATIONAL 579-687

4100-9511 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/DISPLAY (220,230, 240V), EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9512 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (220,230, 240V), EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9513 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (120V), EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9531 MASTER CONTROLLER 1 LOOP– 220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9532 MASTER CONTROLLER 2 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9533 MASTER CONTROLLER 3 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9534 MASTER CONTROLLER 5 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 Card

574-848

4100-9542 NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 579-269

4100-9600 BASIC TRANSPONDER 574-8444100-9601 LOCAL MODE TRANSPONDER 574-844

4100-9607 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271

4100-9608 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-2714100-9609 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271

4100-9610 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR 579-271

4100-9611 REMOTE ANNUN EXTERNAL POWER 579-271

4100-9612 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-2714100-9613 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271

4100-9614 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271

4100-9620 BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-ANALOG 748-5894100-9621 BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-DIGITAL 748-589

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation Instructions

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

E-7

Appendix E

4100-9816 MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE KIT 574-9134100-9832 SERVICE MODEM MODULE (566-276) 574-046

4100-9833 4020 RETRO-FIT KIT 579-229

4100-9854 4100 Module Legacy Bay Mounting Kit 579-913

4190-9018 FIBER MODEM AUDIO Exp BOARD 579-5814905-9835 Temporal Code 4 Module 579-840

4907-9001 TrueAlert Text Messaging Appliance 579-829Notes:

1. The current for all LED and Switch modules is included with the current for 4100-1288 and 4100-1289.

2. Amplifier standby current has two settings. The .085 A number is used if the System Option for "Audio Power Conservation" is selected. This option shuts down the power stage when operating on secondary power (battery standby).

3. Add .8 mA (standby) / 1 mA (alarm) per device to calculate the current requirements for 4100-3101, 4100-3104, 4100-3105, 4100-3106 or 4100-3107 module.

4. Add 1.7 mA per device to calculate the current requirements for 4100-3102 MAPNET module.

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation Instructions

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

F-1

Appendix FLabels

.

Continued on next page

GRAPHIC I/O (ASSY 562-789) LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO 32 POINT MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

8-POINT MONITOR CLASS B (ASSY 562-731) LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO CLASS B MOTHERBOARD (562-856)

8-POINT MONITOR CLASS A (ASSY 562-813) LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO CLASS A MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

MAPNET CHANNEL CLASS A OR B LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO 562-727 MOTHERBOARD AND

565-158 DAUGHTER CARD

MAPNET TRANSCEIVER (ASSY 562-926) LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO 562-974 MAPNET POWER SUPPLY

RS-232/2120 INTERFACE BOARD (ASSY 565-004) LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO CLASS B MOTHERBOARD (562-856) OR TBI MOTHERBOARD (565-161

OR 565-213)

3 A AUX RELAY (ASSY 565-045) LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO 32-POINT MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

2 A AUX RELAY (ASSY 562-760) LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO 32-POINT MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

10 A AUX RELAY (ASSY 562-951) LABELS TO BE

APPLIED TO ASSY 562-952

F-2

Appendix F

AUDIO NAC LABELS

SPS/RPS LABELS

PHONE LABELS

FLEX 50 LABELS

XNAC LABELS

XPS LABELS

100 W AMP

LABELS

Labels, (continued)

G-1

Appendix G

Earth Fault Diagnostics

Overview This appendix contains instructions on how to use the Earth Fault Search feature of the 4100ES diagnostics menus. The minimum Earth Fault detection level for the 4100ES is 10k ohms for all circuits.

Earth Fault Search is a diagnostic search of external field wiring that assists in locating circuits with earth faults. An earth fault occurs when an electrical circuit is shorted to ground. Although most circuits operate with a single earth fault, multiple earth faults can disable communications. Because of this, earth faults must be located and repaired.

Earth Fault Search is conducted by the FACP. The diagnostic may be activated using either the front panel interface or the Computer Port Protocol (CPP), using a service port.

The 4100ES supports two types of Earth Fault Searches:

• Location Search. Searches all circuits at a location, such as a transponder or the main panel. For the purposes of Earth Fault Searching,

- A location is composed of a group of slaves connected to each other via 4100 Comm (local RUI).

- The main panel is defined as all slaves local to the Master CPU.- A transponder denotes all slaves associated with a single Transponder Interface Card

(TIC)/Local Mode TIC slave.

• IDNet Channel Search. Selectively enables channel isolators and repeaters to detect which segment of the channel wiring has a fault.

- Earth faults are detected by one of the following:- A single designated power supply at a location. The power supply that detects the fault

is designated via a jumper setting on the power supply slave. For any given location, only one power supply should detect earth faults.

- Each 4009 IDNet NAC Extender on an IDNet channel.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

General Guidelines G-2

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel G-3

Search Results G-6

Earth Fault Search Example G-8

G-2

Appendix G

General Guidelines

General Guidelines

Review the guidelines below before initiating an Earth Fault Search.

• The Detect Earth Fault jumper must be installed at each SPS, RPS, TPS, IPS, or 4009T for earth fault detection to occur.

• Only one power supply per location is configured to detect earth faults.

• For more reliable earth fault searching:

- Use a Firefighter Telephone NAC for each telephone riser connection to a transponder.- Use IDNet channel isolators to isolate channel faults to a specific segment of channel

wiring.- Set IDNet channel isolator addresses to the lowest IDNet device addresses, increasing

with communication distance from the IDNet card.

• If an earth fault is suspected on the IDNet channel with multiple isolators, start an IDNet Channel Search before doing a Location Search. If the Location Search is done first, it may not yield the correct location (this is a by-product of the extended amount of time required for the IDNet channel to initialize during a Location Search). Note: The 4009 IDNet NAC Extender has a common ground fault trouble that reports to the panel without running the Earth Fault Search.

• Earth Fault Search detects only one fault at a time. Multiple faults require fixing the first fault and then repeating the search.

• The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the Earth Fault Search.

• Location Earth Fault Searches optionally allow exclusion of auxiliary power circuits from the search, so that modules connected to the 24 V auxiliary outputs can remain in operation during the search.

• The option to exclude auxiliary power circuits does not apply to IDNet devices, because the entire IDNet communication channel is isolated during each search.

• During the search, all related troubles are suppressed and a single trouble pseudo-point is activated (P438).

• At the completion of the search, all slaves are restarted and normal panel operation resumes.

• Earth Fault Search is only supported by new 4100ES modules. 4100 Legacy (slot format) modules are not supported, with the following exceptions:

- MAPNET channel isolation during location search- IPS for earth fault detection (not recommended). The Earth Fault Search may fail

because the isolation circuits of some 4100ES slaves (such as the 4100ES telephone slave) do not support IPS.

IMPORTANT: The fire panel cannot provide fire protection during an Earth Fault Search.

G-3

Appendix G

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel

Overview This section describes how to conduct an Earth Fault Search, from selecting the appropriate access code to correcting the fault.

Access Level Selection

The panel must be at the appropriate access level (1, 2, 3, or 4) in order to run diagnostics. To get to the correct access level,

1. Press the Menu button. The following message comes up (press the Next or Previous buttons, if necessary, to display it):

2. Press the Enter button. Now you are prompted to log in or log out.

3. Press the "1" key on the numeric keypad to log in, so that the passcode prompt comes up.

4. Enter the passcode and press the Enter button. ACCESS GRANTED displays briefly on the LCD, and then the display goes back to:

You can now open the diagnostic menu as described in the next topic.

Starting the Earth Fault Search

To start an Earth Fault Search,

1. If necessary, press the Menu button to access the menus.

2. Press the Previous or Next buttons until the diagnostic functions option appears:

3. Press the Enter button. Then press Next or Previous buttons until the Earth Fault Search option appears:

Continued on next page

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll Change Access Level?

1=Login 2=LogoutCURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = x

Enter a Passcode followed by <ENTER>

1=Login 2=LogoutCURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = y

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scrollDiagnostic Functions?

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scrollEarth Fault Search?

G-4

Appendix G

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel (continued)

Starting the Earth Fault Search

4. Press the Enter button. The following options become available when you press the Next and Previous buttons:

The search types are described below. When you have determined what kind of search to initiate, display its option (one of the three shown above) and press the Enter button. Each option has its own topic, below.

Search Option A: Select Location

• If you select the Location Search menu item, a list of cards to search becomes available. Use the Next and Previous buttons to scroll through the list.

• If you find a card that you suspect is connected to a circuit with an earth ground, press the Enter button when that circuit is shown.

• Before you can start the search, the Aux Power Select option comes up.

• The number you select, 1 or 2, determines whether the auxiliary power circuit on the selected board is searched for earth grounds. If you exclude the auxiliary power circuit from the search, the circuit will continue to operate normally.

• Press 1 (or just press the Enter button) to exclude the card's auxiliary power circuits from the search, or press 2 to remove auxiliary power circuits from normal operation and search them for earth grounds.

• Now you are prompted to start the search. When the location you want to search is shown and "Press <ENTER> to start search" displays, the search is ready to start. A sample is shown below.

Note: The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the search.

• Press the Enter button to start the search.

• As the search progresses, watch the display for an indication of how much of the search has been completed. The search can be aborted at any time if you press the Clear button.

• Skip ahead to the "Completing the Search" topic.

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scrollLocation Search

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scrollIDNet Channel Search

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scrollLast Search Result

1=Exclude 2=IncludeExclude AUXPWR circuits from search?

CARD 1, SYSTEM POWER SUPPLYPress <ENTER> to start search

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait... 40%

G-5

Appendix G

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel (continued)

Search Option B: Select Channel

• If you select the IDNet Channel Search menu item, a list of IDNet channels to search becomes available. Use the Next and Previous buttons to scroll through the list. When the IDNet channel you want to search is shown and "Press <ENTER> to start search" displays, the search is ready to start. A sample screen is shown below.

Note: The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the search.

• Press the Enter button to start the search.

• As the search progresses, watch the display for an indication of how much of the search has been completed. The search can be aborted at any time if you press the Clear button.

Skip ahead to the "Completing the Search" topic.

Search Option C: Last Search Result

This option simply displays the last Earth Fault Search result. If there has been no search since the last system startup, or if the last search was aborted, the panel displays "RESULT NOT AVAILABLE."

Completing the Search

When a Location or IDNet Channel Search completes, all of the following occurs:

• All slaves automatically reset.

• The FACP turns off the Earth Fault Search trouble pseudo-point.

• The panel displays the specific fault information.

The panel can only return one Earth Fault Search result at a time. If another fault exists, it can only be found via diagnostics after the first fault is cleared. Faults will continue to appear, one by one, until each one has been found and corrected.

Continue to the next topic for a list of search results and their required actions.

IDNET CHANNEL M12Press <ENTER> to select for search

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait... 40%

IMPORTANT: Once you have been directed to an earth ground fault and corrected it, it is recommended that you restart the system (warm- or cold-start).

G-6

Appendix G

Search Results

Overview There are several types of results that can display at the end of an Earth Fault Search. This section covers all types of results.

Non-Point Faults A non-point fault indicates a ground that cannot be traced to an addressable point (for example, a shield or an audio riser). The earth fault in this example is not occurring at the audio controller but somewhere in the riser:

Non-point faults can be displayed for each of the following items:

• Shield (Flex 50/100 W Amplifier)

• Audio Riser (Digital./Analog Audio Controller; Local Mode Transponder; may also annunciate as "DAR SECONDARY" (Digital Audio Riser Secondary) on transponder)

• Remote Mic 1 and Push-to-Talk line (Digital./Analog Audio Controller) (other remote mics are not supported)

• Channel Output (IDNet Card; MAPNET Interface Card)

• RUI Channel (Master Controller Card)

• Channel 1 to 3 (TrueAlert Power Supply)

Point Faults A point fault indicates a ground at a specific addressable point. The example below is a location earth ground search result, where 3 is the card address, 10 is the point number, and 0 is the sub-point number (not used):

Point faults can be found at any point in the system that connects to field wiring.

Some IDNet channel point fault examples are illustrated below.

Fault not cleared. The message below shows that an IDNet channel that has been isolated for fault detection still has the earth fault:

Fault between channel output and first isolator. The message below shows a fault between the IDNet channel output and the first isolator on the line:

Continued on next page

IMPORTANT: Once you have been directed to an earth ground fault and corrected it, it is recommended that you restart the system (warm- or cold-start).

CARD 17, ANALOG AUDIO CONTROLLERAUDIO RISER 1 EARTH FAULT

CARD 003, FLEX 50 AMPLIFIER3-10-0 EARTH FAULT

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)M1, EARTH FAULT SEARCH FAULT CLEAR FAIL

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)M1, CHANNEL OUTPUT EARTH FAULT

G-7

Appendix G

Search Results (continued)

Point Faults 4009 IDNet NAC Extender/TrueAlert Addressable Controller faults. The message below shows a fault detected on the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender before the repeater connected to that circuit is turned on:

Conversely, the following example shows a fault detected after the repeater connected to that circuit is turned on:

IDNet isolator fault. The message below shows a fault detected after the IDNet isolator was turned on:

Fault Not Found If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads FAULT NOT FOUND (for a Location Earth Fault Search) or FAULT CLEAR FAIL (for an IDNet Channel Earth Fault Search), it means the search could not locate the fault, but it acknowledges that a fault exists.

There are three main possibilities behind this message:

• There are one or more internal wiring earth(s) in the system.

• There are system defects (hardware or software, such as a failed isolation circuit).

• An intermittent earth exists in the system (it occurs inconsistently and is therefore difficult to track via diagnostics).

• The cable to the service port may be grounded due to the remote PC's 3-prong plug. Use a non-grounded plug adapter to the remote PC to get rid of the earth ground.

• The fault is on an auxiliary output that was excluded from the search.

The problem may have to be found manually and then corrected in some of the above scenarios.

No Fault If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads NO FAULT, it means the IDNet channel search could not locate any earth faults on that channel.

Result Not Available

If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads RESULT NOT AVAILABLE, it means there is no result to view. This message comes up only when you have selected "Last Search Result" on the menu.

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)M1-18, 4009A NAC EARTH FAULT

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)M1-18, 4009A REPEATER EARTH FAULT

CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)M1-3, IDNET ISOLATOR EARTH FAULT

G-8

Appendix G

Earth Fault Search Example

Earth Fault Search Example

The illustration below shows a MINIPLEX system with one transponder that has three earth faults:

• SPS NAC on the SPS in the Main Panel

• RPS AUXPWR output on the RPS in Transponder 1

• IDNet channel in Transponder 1

Figure G-1. Earth Fault Example

The panel reports two earth faults, one for each power supply. The third fault is as yet unreported.

The example below shows the progression of events in finding and repairing the three faults. They are presented as instructions to a technician who does not yet know about the third fault.

A. Find and repair the fault in the main panel.1. After opening the Earth Fault Search diagnostic menu option, select Location Search.

2. .Select the SPS located in the Main Panel (this selects the Main Panel as the location for the search).

3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.4. Start the search. (The panel turns on the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point and the

keypad inactivity utility pseudo-point to disable timeout during the search).5. The search completes. The panel indicates that NAC 2 on the SPS has the earth fault. All

slaves are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).6. Repair the earth fault on NAC 2.

When this is done, the trouble from the SPS clears but the trouble from the RPS is still indicated.

Continued on next page

Transponder1

MainPanel

RUI

SPS NAC 2

RPSAUXPW R

Iso1

Iso2

= Ground Fault

RPS

SPS

IDNet

IDNetChannel

M2

G-9

Appendix G

Earth Fault Search Example (continued)

Earth Fault Search Example

B. Find and repair the indicated fault on Transponder 1. 1. Select Location Search.

2. Select the RPS located in Transponder 1 (this selects Transponder 1 as the location for the search).

3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.4. Start the search. (The panel turns on the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point and the

keypad inactivity utility pseudo-point to disable timeout during the search).5. The search completes. The panel indicates FAULT NOT FOUND because the fault is on the

excluded AUXPWR circuit. All slaves in Transponder 1 are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).

6. Repeat the search but include the AUXPWR circuit this time.7. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on the AUXPWR point on the RPS. All

slaves in Transponder 1 are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).

8. Repair the earth fault on AUXPWR.Even though you have fixed the fault, the trouble from the RPS is still not clearing. Remember that the only two faults you could see at first were from the SPS and RPS. It is time to find and clear the next fault.

C. Find and repair the next indicated fault on Transponder 1. 1. Select Location Search.

2. Select the RPS located in Transponder 1.3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.4. .Start the search.5. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on IDNet Channel M2.6. Start another search, this time an IDNet Channel Search on Channel M2.7. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.8. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on the IDNet channel between isolators 1

and 2.9. Repair the earth fault. The trouble from the RPS is cleared.

H-1

Appendix HSpecial Application NAC-Compatible Notification

Appliances and Accessories

Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

P/N DESCRIPTION

4904-9168 V/O 15CD RED FREE-RUN TNA

4904-9171 V/O 15CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA

4904-9176 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S

4904-9177 V/O 24VDC 15CD WHT VER F/S

4904-9178 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED HORIZ F/S

4904-9183 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED CEIL F/S

4904-9331 V/O 15CD RED SYNC TNA

4904-9342 V/O 15CD WHITE SYNC TNA

4904-9345 V/O 24VDC 15CD WHT PLAIN F/S

4904-9174 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED VER F/S

4904-9180 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED HORIZ F/S

4904-9184 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED CEIL F/S

4904-9346 V/O 24VDC 30CD WHT PLAIN F/S

4904-9169 V/O 75CD RED FREE-RUN TNA

4904-9172 V/O 75CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA

4904-9332 V/O 75CD RED SYNC TNA

4904-9343 V/O 75CD WHITE SYNC TNA

4904-9170 V/O 110CD RED FREE-RUN TNA

4904-9173 V/O 110CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA

4904-9175 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED VER F/S

4904-9181 V/O 24VDC 110CD WHT VER F/S

4904-9182 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED HOR F/S

4904-9185 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED CEIL F/S

4904-9333 V/O 110CD RED SYNC TNA

4904-9344 V/O 110CD WHITE SYNC TNA

4906-9101 V/O 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED TNA

4906-9103 V/O 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT TNA

4906-9102 V/O 15/30/75/110cd C/M RED TNA

4906-9104 V/O 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT TNA

4906-9105 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M RED

4906-9106 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M WHT

4906-9113 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M (CAN) RED

4903-9356 S/V 15CD RED 25/70V TNA

4903-9359 S/V 15CD WHITE 25/70V TNA

4903-9150 S/V 24VDC 15CD RED HORIZ F/S

4903-9153 S/V 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S

H-2

Appendix H

4903-9193 S/V 24VDC 15CD WHT HORIZ F/S

4903-9196 S/V15CD RND

4903-9148 S/V 24VDC 30CD RED HORIZ F/S

4903-9194 S/V 24VDC 30CD WHT HORIZ F/S

4903-9197 S/V, 30CD, RND TNA

4903-9357 S/V 75CD RED 25/70V TNA

4903-9360 S/V 75CD WHITE 25/70V TNA

4903-9358 S/V 110CD RED 25/70V TNA

4903-9361 S/V 110CD WHITE 25/70V TNA

4903-9198 S/V 110CD, RND TNA

4906-9151 S/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED TNA

4906-9153 S/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT TNA

4906-9154 S/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT TNA

4901-9820 HORN 24VDC RED TNA

4901-9822 HORN 24VDC RED

4009-9201 NAC EXTENDER 120VAC, IDNET

4009-9301 NAC EXTENDER, 240VAC, IDNET

4009-9401 4009 T/A ADDR CONTROLLER

4903-9252 A/V 24VDC 15CD RED HOR F/S

4903-9253 A/V 24VDC 30CD RED HOR F/S

4903-9254 A/V 24VDC 110CD RED HOR F/S

4903-9255 A/V 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S

4903-9256 A/V 24VDC 110CD RED VER F/S

4903-9257 A/V 24VDC 15CD WHT HOR F/S

4903-9258 A/V 24VDC 30CD WHT HOR F/S

4903-9417 A/V 15CD RED SYNC TNA

4903-9418 A/V 75CD RED SYNC TNA

4903-9419 A/V 110CD RED SYNC TNA

4903-9425 A/V 15CD RED STD TNA

4903-9426 A/V 75CD RED STD TNA

4903-9427 A/V 110CD RED STD TNA

4903-9428 A/V 15CD WHITE SYNC TNA

4903-9429 A/V 75CD WHITE SYNC TNA

4903-9430 A/V 110CD WHITE SYNC TNA

4903-9431 A/V 15CD WHITE STD TNA

4903-9432 A/V 75CD WHITE STD TNA

Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories (Continued)

P/N DESCRIPTION

Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

H-3

Appendix H

4903-9433 A/V 110CD WHITE STD TNA

4906-9127 A/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED

4906-9129 A/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT

4906-9128 A/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M RED

4906-9130 A/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT

4906-9131 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M RED

4906-9132 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M WHT

4906-9143 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M (CAN) RED

4906-9201 - 9204 MULTI-CANDELA

4906-9251 - 9254 MULTI-CANDELA

4906-9227 - 9230 MULTI-CANDELA

4906-9105 - 9106 WEATHERPROOF

4906-9131 - 9132 WEATHERPROOF

4906-9113 - 9143 WEATHERPROOF

49CMTV-APPLW1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMTV-WWF1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMTV-WWF-BA1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMTV-WRF1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMTV-WRF-BA1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMT-APPLW1 MT HORN

49CMT-WWF1 MT HORN

49CMT-WWF-BA1 MT HORN

49CMT-WRF1 MT HORN

49CMT-WRF-BA1 MT HORN

4905-9815 SMARTSYNC ADAPTER, TNA

4905-9938 SMARTSYNC CTL MODULE

4090-9005 SRP

4090-9006 SRP w/ENCLOSURE

4098-9772 SENSOR BASE WITH 520 Hz SOUNDER

4098-9773 CO SENSOR BASE WITH 520 Hz SOUNDER

1 A maximum of thirteen 49CMT/49CMTV appliances per SmartSync NAC

Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories (Continued)

P/N DESCRIPTION

Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

I-1

Appendix IEPS Compatible Appliances and Devices

EPS Compatible Devices

The following devices are compatible with the EPS.

EPS Compatible Appliances

The following appliances are compatible with the EPS.Table I-2. Compatible Appliances

Table I-1. Compatible Devices

Addressable Appliance Description Model Numbers

4009 IDNAC Repeater4009-9601 (platinum)4009-9602 (red)

Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) 4100-6103

TrueAlert Addressable Isolator+ module 4905-9929

Addressable Appliance Description

TrueAlert ES Appliances TrueAlert Appliances

Model Numbers Model Numbers

Audible Only Horn notification appliances

49AO-WRF49AO-WRF-BA49AO-WRS-BA49AO-WWF49AO-WWF-BA49AO-WWS-BA49AO-APPLC49AO-APPLC-BA

49MT-APPLW1

49MT-WRF1

49MT-WRF-BA1

49MT-WRS-BA1

49MT-WWS-BA1

49MT-WWF-BA1

4901-9850 4901-9853

Audible/Visible notification appliances

49AV-WRF49AV-WWF49AV-WRF-BA49AV-WRQ-BA49AV-WRS-BA49AV-WWF-BA49AV-WWS-BA49AV-APPLC49AV-APPLC-BA49AVH-APPLC49AVH-APPLC-BA49AVH-APPLCA49AVH-APPLCA-BA49AVH-APPLCB49AVH-APPLCB-BA

49MTV-APPLW2

49MTV-WWF2

49MTV-WWF-BA2

49MTV-WRF2

49MTV-WRF-BA2

49MTV-WRS-BA2

49MTV-WWS-BA2

4906-92274906-92284906-92294906-9230

Visible Only notification appliances

49VO-WRF49VO-WWF49VO-WRA-A49VO-WWA-A49VO-WRA-BA49VO-WRF-BA49VO-WRQ-BA49VO-APPLC49VO-APPLC-BA49VOH-APPLC49VOH-APPLC-BA49VOH-APPLCA49VOH-APPLCA-BA

49VOH-APPLCB49VOH-APPLCB-BA49VO-WRS-BA49VO-WWA-BA49VO-WWF-BA49VO-WWS-BA49VO-WRA-A-BA49VO-WWA-A-BA49VO-WWS-A-BA

4906-92014906-92024906-92034906-9204

Speaker/Visible notification appliances -

4906-92514906-92534906-9254

Continued on next page

I-2

Appendix I EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices

ES Compatible Appliances

Table I-2. Compatible Appliances (Continued)

Addressable Appliance Description

TrueAlert ES AppliancesTrueAlert Appliances

Model Numbers Model Numbers

Audible/Visible Weatherproof notification appliances

49AV-WRFO49AV-WRFO-BA

49AV-WWFO-BA49AV-APPLW-CO

-

Visible Only Weatherproof notification appliances

49VO-WRFO49VO-WRFO-BA49VO-WRSO-BA

49VO-WWFO-BA49VO-APPLW-CO -

LED Visible-Only Wall-Mount 59VO-WRF59VO-WRF-BA59VO-WWF59VO-WWF-BA59VO-WRFAB

59VO-WRFAB-BA59VO-WWFAB59VO-WWFAB-BA59VO-APPLWR59VO-APPLWW

LED Visible-Only High-Candela Wall-Mount

59VO-WRFH-BA59VO-WWFH-BA59VO-WRFABH-BA

59VO-WWFABH-BA59VO-APPLWRH59VO-APPLWWH

LED Visible-Only Wall-Mount Weatherproof

59VO-WRFO59VO-WRFO-BA59VO-WWFO-BA59VO-WRFABO

59VO-WRFABO-BA59VO-WWFABO-BA59VO-APPLWR-O59VO-APPLWW-O

LED Visible-Only High-Candela Wall-Mount Weatherproof

59VO-APPLWRH-O59VO-APPLWWH-O

LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount 59AV-WRF59AV-WRF-BA59AV-WWF59AV-WWF-BA59AV-WRFAB

59AV-WRFAB-BA59AV-WWFAB59AV-WWFAB-BA59AV-APPLWR59AV-APPLWW

LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount High-Candela

59AV-WRFH59AV-WRFH-BA59AV-WWFH-BA59AV-WRFABH59AV-WRFABH-BA

59AV-WWFABH-BA59AV-APPLWRH59AV-APPLWWH

LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount Weatherproof

59AV-WRFO59AV-WRFO-BA59AV-WWFO-BA59AV-WRFABO

59AV-WRFABO-BA59AV-WWFABO-BA59AV-APPLWR-O59AV-APPLWW-O

LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount High Candela Weatherproof

59AV-APPLWRH-O59AV-APPLWWH-O

Audible-Only Wall-Mount 59AO-WRS59AO-WRS-BA59AO-WWS

59AO-WWS-BA59AO-APPLWR59AO-APPLWW

Audible-Only Wall-Mount Weatherproof

59AO-WRSO59AO-WRSO-BA59AO-WWSO-BA

59AO-APPLWR-O59AO-APPLWW-O

Wall-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible (and Backplate)

49SV-APPLW(-BA)49HFV-APPLW(-BA)49MP-SVWR49MP-SVWW

49SO-APPLW(-BA)49HF-APPLW(-BA)49MP-SOWR49MP-SOWW

Ceiling-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible

49SO-APPLC(-BA)49HF-APPLC(-BA)49SV-APPLC(-BA)49HFV-APPLC(-BA)

49SVH-APPLC(-BA)49HFVH-APPLC(-BA)49HFVH-APLCA-BA49HFVH-APLCB-BA

Plate 59AP-EUROBB

1 A maximum of thirty-two 49MT appliances per NAC2 A maximum of twenty-one 49MTV appliances per circuit

EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices

J-1

Appendix JCooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES

Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications

Overview The tables in this appendix list Cooper Wheelock appliances compatible with 4100ES Wheelock protocol for special applications.

Synchronizing Horn Strobes

Table J-1. Synchronizing Horn Strobes

Appliance Description

AS-241575W AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

AS-24MCW AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

AS-24MCC AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

AS-24MCWH AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

AS-24MCCH AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

ASWP-2475W, ASWP-2475C AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount

ASWP-24MCWH AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

ASWP-24MCCH AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

ASA-24MCW, ASB-24MCW AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue

ASA-24MCC, ASB-24MCC AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue

HSR HN STR, Red , 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount

HSRC HN STR, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount

HSRCS HN STR, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount

HSRS HN STR, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount

HSW HN STR, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount

HSWC HN STR, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount

HSWCS HN STR, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount

HSWS HN STR, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount

HS4-241575W HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

HS4-24MCW HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

HS4-24MCWH HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

HS4-24MCC HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

NS-241575W NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

NS-24MCW NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

NS-24MCC NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

NS-24MCCH NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

ZNS-MCW ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

ZNS-MCWH ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

ZNS-24MCC ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

ZNS-24MCCH ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

J-2

Appendix J

Synchronizing strobes

Table J-2. Synchronizing strobes

Appliance Description

RSS-241575W RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

RSSP-241575W RSSP Series Strobe. 12VDC or 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

RSS-24MCW, RSSP-24MCW RSS/RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

RSS-24MCWH, RSSP-24MCWH RSS/RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

RSS-24MCC, RSS-24MCCR RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount (R=Round)

RSS-24MCCH, RSS-24MCCHR RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount (R=Round)

RSSR-2415W, RSSR-2415C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 15Cd, Red, Wall or Ceiling Mount

RSSR-2475W, RSSR-2475C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 75Cd, Red, Wall or Ceiling Mount

RSSR-24110C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 110Cd, Red, Ceiling Mount

RSSA-24110W, RSSB-24110W,RSSG-24110W, RSSR-24110W

RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 110Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red.

RSSA-24MCC, RSSB-24MCC,RSSG-24MCC, RSSR-24MCC

RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red.

RSSA-24MCCH, RSSB-24MCCH,RSSG-24MCCH, RSSR-24MCCH

RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red.

RSSPA-24MCC RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber

RSSWPA-2475W RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Wall Mount. Amber

RSSWPA-24MCCH,RSSWPB-24MCCH,RSSWPG-24MCCH,RSSWPR-24MCCH

RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red.

RSSWP-2475W, RSSWP-2475C RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount

RSSWP-24MCWH RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

RSSWP-24MCCH RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

STR STR, Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount

STRC STR, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount

STRCS STR, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount

STRS STR, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount

STW STR, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount

STWC STR, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount

STWCS STR, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount

STWS STR, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount

ZRS-MCW ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

ZRS-MCWH ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

ZRS-24MCC ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

ZRS-24MCCH ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

Compatible Appliances (continued)

J-3

Appendix J

Appliances with synchronizing strobes

Table J-3. Appliances with synchronizing strobes

Appliance Description

(Only Strobe portion compatible with the 4008 Wheelock Protocol for Special Applications)

AMT-241575W,AMT-241575W-NYC

AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

AMT-24MCW AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

MT-241575W MT Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount.

MT-24MCW MT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

MTWP-2475W, MTWP-2475C MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount

MTWP-24MCWH MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

MTWP-24MCCH MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

MTWPA-2475W, MTWPB-2475WMTWPG-2475W, MTWPR-2475W

MTWP Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red

MTA-24MCCH, MTB-24MCCH,MTG-24MCCH, MTR-24MCCH

MT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red

MTWPA-24MCCH, MTWPB-24MCCH,MTWPG-24MCCH,MTWPR-24MCCH

MTWP Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red

ET70WP-2475W, ET70WP-2475C ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount

ET70WP-24185W ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 185Cd, Wall Mount

ET70WP-24177C ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 177Cd, Ceiling Mount

ET70WPA-2475 ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mt. Amber

CH70-241575W CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

CH70-24MCW CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

CH90-24MCC CH90 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

CH70-24MCWH CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

CH90-24MCCH CH90 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

E50-241575W E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

E50-24MCW E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

E50-24MCWH E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

E50A-24MCC, E50B-24MCC E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mt. Amber/Blue

E60-24MCW E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

E60-24MCWH E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

E60-24MCC E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

E60-24MCCH E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

E70-241575W E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

E70-24MCW E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

E70-24MCWH E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

E70-24MCC, E90-24MCC E70/E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

E90-24MCCH E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

Compatible Appliances (continued)

J-4

Appendix J

Synchronizing horns

E60A-24MCC, E70A-24MCC,E70B-24MCC, E90A-24MCC, E90B-24MCC

E60/E70/E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue

ET70-241575W, ET90-241575W ET70/ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

ET70-24MCW ET70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

ET70-24MCWH ET70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

ET70-24MCC, ET90-24MCC ET70/ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

ET70WPG-2475, ET70WPB-2475WET70WPG-2475W, ET70WPR-2475W

ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mt. Green, Blue, Red

ET90-24MCCH ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

ET80-241575W ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount

ET80-24MCW ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

ET80-24MCWH ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount

S8-24MCC S8 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

S8-24MCCH S8 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

SA-S70-24MCW SA-S70 Series Amp-Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount

SA-S90-24MCC SA-S90 Series Amp-Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount

Table J-3. Appliances with synchronizing strobes (Continued)

Appliance Description

Table J-4. Synchronizing horns

Appliance Description

AH-24 AH Series Horn. 24VDC

AH-24WP AH Series Weatherproof Horn. 12VDC or 24VDC

HS-24 HS Series Horn. 24VDC

HNR Horn, Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount

HNRC Horn, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24V, 3dB, 5 Mount

HNRCS Horn, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24V, 3dB, 5 Mount

HNRS Horn, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount

HNW Horn, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount

HNWC Horn, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount

HNWCS Horn, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount

HNWS Horn, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount

MIZ-24S MIZ Series Horn. 24VDC

NH-12/24, NH-12/24R NH Series Horn. 12/24VDC (R=Round)

ZNH ZNH Series Horn. 12/24VDC

Compatible Appliances (continued)

J-5

Appendix J

Coded audible appliances

Non-synchronizing appliances

Table J-5. Coded audible appliances

Appliance Description

AMT-12/24, AMT-12/24-NYC AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn. 12/24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount

CH70, CH90 CH70/CH90 Series Chime. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount

CSX10-24-DC, CSXG10-24-DC CSX Series Bell. 24VDC, Wall Mount

MT-12/24, MT4-12/24 MT Series Multi-Tone Horn. 12/24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount

Table J-6. Non-synchronizing appliances

Appliance Description

MB-G6-24, MB-G10-24 MB Series Bell. 24V, Wall Mount

Compatible Appliances (continued)

K-1

Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency

Alarm

Overview The following audio system components have been tested by UL to meet the requirements in UL464 Section 24.3 "Determination of low frequency signal format". These components have only been tested with Simplex speaker Notification Appliances and accessories. The only compatible signal is the "Horn [520 Hz]" added in revision D of the audio library, chipset 42.

Compatible Audio System Components Table K-1. Compatible Audio System Components

Audio System Component Description Model Numbers

Basic Audio with Microphone 4100-96204100-9621

Analog Audio Controller Board 4100-12104100-1311

Digital Audio Controller Board

Analog Flex 35 and Flex 50 Amplifiers 4100-13124100-13134100-13634100-1364

Digital Flex 35 and Flex 50 Amplifiers 4100-13264100-13274100-13634100-1364

Analog 100W Amplifiers 4100-13144100-13154100-13184100-13194100-13204100-13214100-13244100-1325

Digital 100W Amplifiers 4100-13284100-13294100-13324100-13334100-13344100-13354100-13384100-1339

Flex Amp Expansion NAC Board 4100-1245

Flex Amp Class A Adapter 4100-1246

100 Watt Expansion NAC Board 4100-1248

100 Watt Class A Adapter 4100-1249

Expansion Signal Card and Accessories 4100-12664100-12674100-5116

K-2

Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm

Compatible Audio Equipment (continued)

Compatible Notification Appliances

The list of compatible Simplex Speaker Notification Appliances and accessories is as follows.

Table K-2. Compatible Notification Appliances

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

Wall Mount Speaker Only 4902-97164902-9717

Ceiling Mount Speaker Only 4902-9721

Wall Mount Speaker Visible 4906-91514606-9153

Wall Mount ADDR Speaker Visible 4906-92544906-92554906-9256

Ceiling Mount ADDR Speaker Visible 4906-92544906-92554906-9256

Cover Accessories 4905-98114905-98124905-98144905-98274905-98454905-98464905-99804905-99814905-99884905-99894905-99914905-99964905-9997

Surface Mount Adapter Skirts 4905-99414905-99424905-99464905-9947

49XX Series Ceiling-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible

49SO-APPLC(-BA)49SV-APPLC(-BA)

49SVH-APPLC(-BA)49HFVH-APLCA-BA49HF-APPLC(-BA)

49HFV-APPLC(-BA)49HFVH-APPLC(-BA)49HFVH-APLCB-BA

49XX Series Wall-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible 49SV-APPLW(-BA)49SO-APPLW(-BA)49HFV-APPLW(-BA)49HF-APPLW(-BA)

K-3

Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm

49XX Series Dress Cover Accessories 49SOC-CK49SOC-CR49SOC-CW

49SOC-WRBA49SOC-WRBC49SOC-WRBF

49SOC-WRFEU49SOC-WRFIRE

49SOC-WRS49SOC-WWBA49SOC-WWBC49SOC-WWBF

49SOC-WWFEU49SOC-WWFIRE

49SOC-WWS49SVC-CK

49SVC-CRALT49SVC-CRBA49SVC-CRBC49SVC-CRBF

49SVC-CRFEU49SVC-CRFIRE

49SVC-CRS49SVC-CWALT49SVC-CWBA49SVC-CWBC49SVC-CWBF

49SVC-CWFEU49SVC-CWFIRE

49SVC-CWS49SVC-WRALT49SVC-WRBA49SVC-WRBC49SVC-WRBF

49SVC-WRFEU49SVC-WRFIRE

49SVC-WRS49SVC-WWALT49SVC-WWBA49SVC-WWBC49SVC-WWBF

49SVC-WWFEU49SVC-WWFIRE

49SVC-WWS

Table K-2. Compatible Notification Appliances

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

K-4

Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm

Compatible Audio Equipment (continued)

Audio Options Alongside Compatible Equipment

The following equipment is not part of the signal path for the 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm signal and therefore may be used along side compatible components of the audio system.

Table K-3. Audio Options That May Be Configured Alongside Compatible Equipment

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

Auxiliary Audio Input Board 4100-1240

Audio Operator Interface Modules 4100-12524100-12534100-12544100-1255

Expansion Bay 4100-2300

Audio Expansion Bay Harness Kit 4100-2320

Constant Supervision Modules 4100-12594100-1260

Message Expansion Board 4100-12414100-1242

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject to change without notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

574-848Rev. BD